WO2020125761A1 - Image block division method and device - Google Patents

Image block division method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020125761A1
WO2020125761A1 PCT/CN2019/127075 CN2019127075W WO2020125761A1 WO 2020125761 A1 WO2020125761 A1 WO 2020125761A1 CN 2019127075 W CN2019127075 W CN 2019127075W WO 2020125761 A1 WO2020125761 A1 WO 2020125761A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
current image
image block
block
preset threshold
current
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/127075
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
赵寅
杨海涛
张恋
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201910017097.XA external-priority patent/CN111355959B/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020125761A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020125761A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/503Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
    • H04N19/51Motion estimation or motion compensation
    • H04N19/563Motion estimation with padding, i.e. with filling of non-object values in an arbitrarily shaped picture block or region for estimation purposes

Definitions

  • the present application relates to video image technology, and in particular, to an image block division method and device.
  • Digital video capabilities can be incorporated into a variety of devices, including digital TVs, digital live broadcast systems, wireless broadcast systems, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop or desktop computers, tablet computers, e-book readers, Digital cameras, digital recording devices, digital media players, video game devices, video game consoles, cellular or satellite radio phones (so-called "smart phones"), video teleconferencing devices, video streaming devices, and the like .
  • Digital video devices implement video compression technology, for example, in the standards defined by MPEG-2, MPEG-4, ITU-T H.263, ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4 Part 10 Advanced Video Coding (AVC), The video compression technology described in the video coding standard H.265/High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard and extensions to such standards.
  • Video devices can more efficiently transmit, receive, encode, decode, and/or store digital video information by implementing such video compression techniques.
  • Video compression techniques perform spatial (intra-image) prediction and/or temporal (inter-image) prediction to reduce or remove redundancy inherent in video sequences.
  • a video slice ie, a video frame or a portion of a video frame
  • image blocks can also be called tree blocks, coding units (CU, Coding Units), and/or Or coding block.
  • the image block in the to-be-intra-coded (I) slice of the image is encoded using spatial prediction regarding reference samples in adjacent blocks in the same image.
  • An image block in an inter-coded (P or B) slice of an image may use spatial prediction relative to reference samples in neighboring blocks in the same image or temporal prediction relative to reference samples in other reference images.
  • the image may be referred to as a frame, and the reference image may be referred to as a reference frame.
  • the rate-distortion costs corresponding to multiple division methods need to be calculated first, and the rate-distortion cost of each image block can be determined after comparing the rate-distortion costs.
  • Optimal division method when dividing image blocks in the process of decoding a video sequence, it is necessary to continuously analyze the division method of each image block from the code stream, and the image blocks divided according to the parsed division method can be decoded correctly. It can be seen that the image block division method in the prior art causes the calculation complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding to be too high.
  • the present application provides an image block division method and device, which reduces the computational complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding to a certain extent.
  • the present application provides an image block division method, which can be applied to encoding and decoding of video sequences.
  • the method includes: first obtaining the block information of the current image block from the current image or code stream, where the current image block is an image block of the current image; then, according to the block information of the current image block, the current image is determined Whether the block exceeds the boundary of the current image, if the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, then determine the mandatory division method for the current image block, and divide the current image block according to the mandatory division method;
  • the current image block is an image block divided by the current image, corresponding to a node on the coding tree of the current image.
  • the current image block may be a CTU of the current image or a sub-block obtained by dividing the CTU as the root node. It can also be a sub-block of the next level obtained by dividing a sub-block of one level as the root node.
  • the block information of the current image block may include the size information of the current image block, such as the width and height of the current image block, and may also include the coordinates of the pixels in the current image block.
  • the coordinates of the pixels are relative to the upper left vertex of the current image.
  • the coordinates of the pixel position can also be other image-related information corresponding to the current image block. These block information can be obtained from the current image or code stream;
  • the boundary of the current image may include but is not limited to: the right boundary and/or the lower boundary of the current image.
  • the above-mentioned current image block beyond the current image boundary does not mean that there are still pixel values in the current image block beyond the image boundary, but it refers to the current image block in a certain direction or two directions
  • the maximum coordinate value exceeds the coordinate value of the image boundary along the same direction.
  • the forced division method means that the division method of the current image block does not need to be obtained by parsing the code stream, and the current image block is directly divided using the forced division method.
  • the above-mentioned mandatory division method for the current image block can be and is not limited to horizontal binary tree (HBT, Horizontal Binary Tree), vertical binary tree (VBT, Vertical Binary Tree), quadtree (QT, Quad), horizontal expansion quadtree Tree (HEQT, Horizontal Extended Tree) and Vertically Extended Quad Tree (VEQT, Vertical Extended Tree) are one or more cascades of these divisions.
  • HBT and VBT belong to binary tree (BT, Binary Tree) specific application in the division method
  • HEQT and VEQT belong to the specific application in the division method of Extended Quad Tree (EQT, Extended Quad Tree).
  • BT Binary Tree
  • EQT Extended Quad Tree
  • QT concatenated BT/EQT is used, that is, the nodes on the first level coding tree can only be divided into child nodes using QT, and the child nodes of the first level coding tree are the second level coding tree
  • the root node of the second level coding tree can be divided into child nodes using one of the BT or EQT division methods. It should be noted that when a child node uses BT or EQT division, its child nodes can only use BT or EQT division, but not QT division.
  • the current image when scanning according to the zigzag (Zigzag), when an image block in the current image is scanned, that is, the current image block, the current image is parsed from the current image or from the code stream
  • the block information of the image block determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, and determine the forced division method for the current image block that exceeds the boundary of the current image, and perform forced division in this way to avoid encoding
  • the end calculates the rate-distortion cost multiple times, and the decoding end does not need to continuously parse the current image block division method from the code stream, thereby reducing the calculation complexity of the video sequence codec and improving compression performance.
  • determining the forced division method for the current image block includes: comparing the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold, and determining the corresponding forced division method and size for the current image block The information is obtained from the block information.
  • the above-mentioned preset threshold can be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or can also be parsed from the code stream.
  • the value of the preset threshold may be different according to actual needs, and this application does not specifically limit it.
  • the size information of the current image block is compared with a preset threshold to determine the corresponding forced division method for the current image block, Including: if the width of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold and the height of the current image block is greater than the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the width of the current image block is not equal to the first A preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to or the first preset threshold, determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or, if the width of the current image block Is equal to the second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the width of the current image block
  • the corresponding forced division method is determined for the current image block according to the comparison result, including: If the width of the current image block is greater than the A preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the current image block Is not equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or, if the height of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold, and the current image block Is equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; otherwise, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; the second preset
  • the second preset threshold is an integer greater than or equal to 32.
  • the second preset threshold is 64
  • the third preset threshold is 128.
  • the first preset threshold can be set in the video encoder or video decoder (for example, set to 64), or can be obtained by parsing from the code stream.
  • Both the second preset threshold and the third preset value can be set in the video encoder or video decoder, and can also be parsed from the code stream.
  • the second preset threshold may be different from the third preset threshold, for example, the second preset threshold is 64 and the third preset threshold is 128, or the second preset threshold is 64 and the third preset threshold is 32, Of course, there may be a second preset threshold and a third preset threshold, and there may be other values, as long as the condition that the second preset threshold is less than the third preset threshold can be satisfied, this application does not specifically limit .
  • the values of the first preset threshold, the second preset threshold, and the third preset threshold can be set by those skilled in the art according to the needs of actual image division, and are not limited to the above examples.
  • determining the forced division method for the current image block includes: The division method of QT of the cross tree.
  • determining whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image based on the block information includes: according to the block information, obtaining the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block ; Determine whether the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the preset conditions, if the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the first preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the pixel coordinates ( x, y) meet the second preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the pixel coordinate (x, y) meets the third preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds The lower border of the current image.
  • the above pixels are used to represent the current image block. You can select specific pixels in the current image block to represent the current image block. For example, select the pixels of each vertex of the current image block, such as the pixels of the upper left vertex and the pixels of the upper right vertex. The pixel point, the pixel point of the lower left vertex or the pixel point of the lower right vertex, of course, you can also select the pixel point of the center position of the current image block. By comparing the coordinates of these pixel points with the coordinates of the boundary of the current image, it can be determined whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image.
  • any pixel in the current image block can also be selected and used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image.
  • other conditions may also be used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, which is not specifically limited.
  • the coordinates (x, y) of the pixels are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image; accordingly, the first pre Let the condition be: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH ⁇ picH; the second preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW ⁇ picW, And y+cH>picH; the third preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH; where cW is the width of the current image block and cH is the current The height of the image block, picW is the width of the current image, and picH is the height of the current image.
  • the first preset condition, the second preset condition, and the third preset condition are different according to the coordinates (x, y) of the selected pixel point, and are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the method further includes: if the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image, at least according to the current image
  • the size information of the block determines the forced division method for the current image block, and the size information is obtained from the block information; the current image block is divided according to the determined forced division method.
  • a forced division method may also be determined for the current image block, and division is performed according to the determined forced division method.
  • determining a mandatory division method for the current image block includes: calculating the ratio of the width and height of the current image block based on the size information; If it is greater than the fourth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, and the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer; if the ratio is less than the fifth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method , The fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
  • the above fourth preset threshold may be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or may be parsed from the code stream.
  • the fourth preset threshold may take a maximum ratio maxRatio, for example, 4 or 8.
  • the fifth preset threshold can be calculated by taking the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold, then, the fifth preset threshold can be 1/maxRatio, with a value range of (0, 1), such as 1/4 or 1/8.
  • determining a mandatory division method for the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block is an I-band or an I frame; determining the current image block Whether the width and height of are equal to the sixth preset threshold, and the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer; if the image block of the current image is I band or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset
  • the threshold value determines that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
  • the above sixth preset threshold can be set in the video encoder or video decoder (for example, set to 128 or 256), or can also be parsed from the code stream.
  • the method further includes: when no mandatory division method is determined for the current image block , Determine the final division mode from the division modes allowed for the current image block, and divide the current image block according to the final division mode; or, when no mandatory division mode is determined for the current image block , Dividing the current image block according to the division manner indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block.
  • image blocks that do not exceed the boundary of the current image there are cases where the size and image type do not meet the above preset conditions. At this time, it is considered that these image blocks do not have a mandatory division method, then these image blocks can be The current image block is allowed to use the division method or the division method indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block.
  • the method before dividing the current image block according to the allowed division method of the current image block, the method further includes: according to the size information of the current image block, determining that the current image block is not allowed The division method used; where, if the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the HBT division method and the VEQT division method, and the seventh preset threshold value is the side length of the smallest coding unit ; If the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the VBT division method and the HEQT division method; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, then determine the current The image block is not allowed to use the HEQT division method.
  • the eighth preset threshold is twice the seventh preset threshold; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not
  • the seventh preset threshold and the eighth preset threshold may be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or may be obtained by parsing from the code stream.
  • the seventh preset threshold may be minCUSize, which is the minimum CU side length, for example, 4 or 8.
  • the eighth preset threshold can be obtained by calculating twice the seventh preset threshold, that is, taking minCUSize ⁇ 2, for example, taking 8 or 16.
  • the present application provides an image block division device, including several functional units for implementing any one of the methods of the first aspect.
  • the image block division device may include: an acquisition unit for acquiring block information of the current image block in the current image; a determination unit for determining whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image based on the block information; a determination unit, It is used to determine the forced division mode for the current image block if the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image; the division unit is used to divide the current image block according to the forced division mode.
  • the determining unit is specifically configured to compare the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold to determine the corresponding forced division method for the current image block.
  • the size information is determined by the block information acquired.
  • the determining unit includes: a first determining subunit and a second determining subunit; the first determining subunit is used when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, If the width of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold and the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the width of the current image block is not equal to the first A preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to or the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; the second determination subunit is used for when When the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is
  • the determining unit includes: a third determining subunit and a fourth determining subunit; the third determining subunit is used when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, If the width of the current image block is greater than the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; also used if the width of the current image block is less than or Is equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or, the fourth determination subunit , Used to determine that the current image block is forced to comply with the VBT when the width of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary
  • the second preset threshold is an integer greater than or equal to 32.
  • the second preset threshold is 64
  • the third preset threshold is 128.
  • the determining unit is specifically configured to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
  • the judgment unit is configured to obtain the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block according to the block information; determine whether the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel Satisfying the preset condition, if the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the first preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the second preset condition, then It indicates that the pixel exceeds the lower boundary of the current image. If the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the third preset condition, it indicates that the pixel point exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
  • the coordinates (x, y) of the pixels are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image; accordingly, the first pre Let the condition be: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH ⁇ picH; the second preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW ⁇ picW, And y+cH>picH; the third preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH; where cW is the width of the current image block, and cH is the current The height of the image block, picW is the width of the current image, and picH is the height of the current image.
  • the determining unit is further configured to determine a mandatory division method for the current image block based on the size information of the current image block at least according to the size information of the current image block, size information It is obtained from the block information; the dividing unit is also used to divide the current image block according to the determined forced division method.
  • the determination unit further includes: a calculation subunit, a fifth determination subunit, and a sixth determination subunit; the calculation subunit is used to calculate the current image block's size based on the size information The ratio of width to height; the fifth determining subunit is used to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method if the ratio is greater than the fourth preset threshold; the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer; the sixth determining subunit Is used to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method if the ratio is less than the fifth preset threshold, and the fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
  • the determination unit further includes: a determination subunit and a seventh determination subunit; the determination subunit is used to determine whether the current image block is an I band or an I frame; To determine whether the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset threshold, the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer; the seventh determination subunit is used if the current image block is I band or I frame, and the current image If the width and height of the block are equal to the sixth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
  • the dividing unit is further used to determine the final division from the division modes allowed for the current image block when the mandatory division mode is not determined for the current image block Method, and divide the current image block according to the final division method; or, when no mandatory division method is determined for the current image block, according to the division method indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block, The current image block is divided.
  • the dividing unit is further used to determine the current image block according to the size information of the current image block before dividing the current image block according to the allowed division method of the current image block
  • the division method that is not allowed to be used; where, if the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the HBT division method and the VEQT division method, and the seventh preset threshold value is that of the smallest coding unit Side length; if the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VBT and HEQT division; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, the current image is determined Blocks are not allowed to use HEQT division.
  • the eighth preset threshold is twice the seventh preset threshold; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VEQ
  • the present application provides a video encoding method that can be applied to a video encoder; the video encoding method includes: performing any of the image division methods described above in the first aspect to divide the current coding block; dividing the current coding block The outgoing CU performs prediction to obtain a corresponding prediction block; obtains a corresponding residual block according to the current coding block and the prediction block; entropy encodes the residual block to generate a corresponding code stream.
  • the present application provides a video decoding method that can be applied to a video decoder; the video decoding method includes: performing any of the image division methods as described in the first aspect above to divide the current decoding block; dividing the current decoding block The CU is predicted to obtain the corresponding prediction block; according to the residual block and the prediction block parsed from the code stream, the current decoding block is reconstructed.
  • the present application provides a video encoder for encoding an image block, including: any one of the image block division devices of the second aspect, wherein the image block division device is used to obtain the current image from the current image
  • the block information of the coding block is the image block to be coded in the current image; according to the block information, it is judged whether the current coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coding image; if the current coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coding image, it is the current coding
  • the block determines the forced division mode, and divides the current coding block according to the forced division mode; the first prediction processing unit is used to predict the CU divided by the current coding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; the residual calculation unit is used to According to the current coding block and the prediction block, a corresponding residual block is obtained; an entropy coding unit is used to entropy encode the residual block to generate a corresponding code stream.
  • the present application provides a video decoder for decoding an image block from a code stream, including: any one of the image block division devices of the second aspect, wherein the image block division device is used for Obtain the block information of the current decoded block in the code stream.
  • the current decoded block is the image block to be decoded in the current image; according to the block information, determine whether the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image; if the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image , Determine the mandatory division method for the current decoding block, and divide the current decoding block according to the mandatory division method; the second prediction processing unit is used to predict the CU divided by the current decoding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; reconstruction The unit is used to reconstruct the current decoded block according to the residual block and the prediction block parsed from the code stream.
  • the present application provides an apparatus for encoding video data, the apparatus includes:
  • a memory for storing video data, the video data including one or more image blocks
  • the video encoder is used to obtain the block information of the current encoding block from the current image.
  • the current image block is the image block to be encoded in the current image; according to the block information, determine whether the current encoding block exceeds the boundary of the current encoding image; if the current If the coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coded image, determine the mandatory division method for the current coding block, and divide the current coding block according to the mandatory division method; encode the sub-blocks divided by the current coding block to obtain the code corresponding to the current coding block flow.
  • the present application provides an apparatus for decoding video data.
  • the apparatus includes:
  • Memory used to store video data in the form of code stream
  • the video decoder is used to obtain the block information of the current decoding block from the code stream.
  • the current decoding block is the image block to be decoded in the current image; according to the block information, it is determined whether the current decoding block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image; if the current decoding If the block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image, the forced division method is determined for the current decoded block, and the current decoded block is divided according to the forced division method; the coding information of the sub-block divided by the current decoded block is parsed from the code stream, and according to The encoded information reconstructs the current decoded block.
  • the present application provides an encoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, and the processor calls program codes stored in the memory to perform any one of the methods of the first aspect Part or all of the steps.
  • the present application provides a decoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, the processor calling program code stored in the memory to perform any one of the methods of the first aspect Part or all of the steps.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores program code, where the program code includes part or all of the method for performing any one of the first aspects Step instructions.
  • the present application provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to perform part or all of the steps of any one of the methods of the first aspect.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of an example of a video encoding and decoding system in an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of an example of a video decoding system in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an example structure of an encoder in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an example structure of a decoder in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a video decoding device in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of an encoding device or a decoding device in an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a division manner of BT, QT, and EQT in an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a division method based on QT-MTT in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation process of an image block division method in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the current image block exceeding the current image boundary in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an image block division device in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the corresponding device may contain one or more units such as functional units to perform the one or more method steps described (eg, one unit performs one or more steps , Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the corresponding method may include a step to perform the functionality of one or more units (eg, one step executes one or more units Functionality, or multiple steps, each of which performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the features of the exemplary embodiments and/or aspects described herein may be combined with each other.
  • the technical solutions involved in the embodiments of the present application may not only be applied to existing video coding standards (such as H.264, High Performance Video Coding (HEVC, High Efficiency, Video Coding) and other standards), but may also be applied to future video coding In the standard (such as H.266 standard).
  • HEVC High Performance Video Coding
  • H.266 High Efficiency, Video Coding
  • the terminology used in the embodiment section of the present application is only used to explain specific examples of the present application, and is not intended to limit the present application. The following briefly introduces some concepts that may be involved in the embodiments of the present application.
  • Video coding generally refers to processing a sequence of pictures that form a video or video sequence.
  • picture In the field of video coding, the terms “picture”, “frame” or “image” may be used as synonyms.
  • Video coding as used herein means video coding or video decoding.
  • Video encoding is performed on the source side, and usually includes processing (eg, by compressing) the original video picture to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, thereby storing and/or transmitting more efficiently.
  • Video decoding is performed on the destination side and usually involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video picture.
  • the "encoding" of video pictures involved in the embodiments should be understood as referring to the “encoding” or “decoding” of video sequences.
  • the combination of the encoding part and the decoding part is also called codec (encoding and decoding).
  • the video sequence includes a series of pictures, which are further divided into slices, and the slices are further divided into blocks.
  • Video coding is performed in units of blocks.
  • the concept of blocks is further expanded.
  • MB macro block
  • coding unit CU, Coding Unit
  • prediction unit PU, Prediction Unit
  • transformation unit TU, Transform Unit
  • the CU can be divided into smaller CUs according to the Quad Tree (QT, Quad Tree), and the smaller CU can continue to be divided to form a quad tree structure.
  • the CU divides and encodes the encoded image Basic unit.
  • PU can correspond to the prediction block and is the basic unit of predictive coding.
  • the CU is further divided into multiple PUs according to the division mode.
  • the TU can correspond to the transform block and is the basic unit for transforming the prediction residual.
  • CU, PU or TU they all belong to the concept of block (or image block) in essence.
  • the CTU is split into multiple CUs by using a quadtree structure represented as a coding tree.
  • a decision is made at the CU level whether to use inter-picture (temporal) or intra-picture (spatial) prediction to encode picture regions.
  • Each CU can be further split into one, two, or four PUs according to the PU split type.
  • the same prediction process is applied within a PU, and related information is transmitted to the decoder on the basis of the PU.
  • the CU may be divided into transform units (TU, Transform Unit) according to other quadtree structures similar to the coding tree used for the CU.
  • quad-tree and binary-tree QTBT, Quad-Tree and Binary Tree partition frames are used to split the coding blocks.
  • the CU may have a square or rectangular shape.
  • the image block to be encoded in the current encoded image may be referred to as the current image block.
  • the reference block is a block that provides a reference signal for the current image block, where the reference signal represents a pixel value within the image block.
  • the block in the reference image that provides the prediction signal for the current image block may be a prediction block, where the prediction signal represents a pixel value or a sample value or a sample signal within the prediction block. For example, after traversing multiple reference blocks, the best reference block is found. This best reference block will provide a prediction for the current image block. This block is called a prediction block.
  • the original video picture can be reconstructed, that is, the reconstructed video picture has the same quality as the original video picture (assuming no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission).
  • further compression is performed by, for example, quantization to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, but the decoder side cannot fully reconstruct the video picture, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video picture is better than the original video picture. The quality is lower or worse.
  • Several video coding standards of H.261 belong to "lossy hybrid video codec” (ie, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the sample domain with 2D transform coding for applying quantization in the transform domain).
  • Each picture of a video sequence is usually divided into non-overlapping block sets, which are usually encoded at the block level.
  • the encoder side usually processes the encoded video at the block (video block) level.
  • the prediction block is generated by spatial (intra-picture) prediction and temporal (inter-picture) prediction.
  • the processing part is applied to the encoded or compressed block to reconstruct the current image block for representation.
  • the encoder duplicates the decoder processing loop so that the encoder and decoder generate the same prediction (eg, intra prediction and inter prediction) and/or reconstruction for processing, ie encoding subsequent blocks.
  • FIG. 1A exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a video encoding and decoding system 10 applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video encoding and decoding system 10 may include a source device 12 and a destination device 14, the source device 12 generates encoded video data, and therefore, the source device 12 may be referred to as a video encoding device.
  • the destination device 14 may decode the encoded video data generated by the source device 12, and therefore, the destination device 14 may be referred to as a video decoding device.
  • Various implementations of source device 12, destination device 14, or both may include one or more processors and memory coupled to the one or more processors.
  • Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include various devices, including desktop computers, mobile computing devices, notebook (eg, laptop) computers, tablet computers, set-top boxes, telephone handsets such as so-called "smart" phones, etc. Devices, televisions, cameras, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, in-vehicle computers, wireless communication devices, or the like.
  • device embodiments may also include the functionality of both the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie, the source device 12 or The corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality.
  • the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .
  • the communication connection between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be via a link 13, and the destination device 14 may receive the encoded video data from the source device 12 via the link 13.
  • Link 13 may include one or more media or devices capable of moving encoded video data from source device 12 to destination device 14.
  • link 13 may include one or more communication media that enable source device 12 to transmit encoded video data directly to destination device 14 in real time.
  • the source device 12 may modulate the encoded video data according to a communication standard (eg, a wireless communication protocol), and may transmit the modulated video data to the destination device 14.
  • the one or more communication media may include wireless and/or wired communication media, such as a radio frequency (RF, Radio Frequency) spectrum or one or more physical transmission lines.
  • RF radio frequency
  • the one or more communication media may form part of a packet-based network, such as a local area network, a wide area network, or a global network (eg, the Internet).
  • the one or more communication media may include routers, switches, base stations, or other devices that facilitate communication from source device 12 to destination device 14.
  • the source device 12 includes an encoder 20.
  • the source device 12 may further include a picture source 16, a picture pre-processor 18, and a communication interface 22.
  • the encoder 20, the picture source 16, the picture pre-processor 18, and the communication interface 22 may be hardware components in the source device 12, or may be software programs in the source device 12. They are described as follows:
  • Picture source 16 which can include or can be any type of picture capture device, for example to capture real-world pictures, and/or any type of picture or comment (for screen content encoding, some text on the screen is also considered to be encoded Part of the picture or image) generation device, for example, a computer graphics processor for generating computer animation pictures, or for acquiring and/or providing real-world pictures, computer animation pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality (VR, Virtual Reality (picture), any type of device, and/or any combination thereof (for example, Augmented Reality (AR) picture).
  • the picture source 16 may be a camera for capturing pictures or a memory for storing pictures.
  • the picture source 16 may also include any type of (internal or external) interface that stores previously captured or generated pictures and/or acquires or receives pictures.
  • the picture source 16 may be, for example, a local or integrated camera integrated in the source device; when the picture source 16 is a memory, the picture source 16 may be a local or integrated, for example, integrated in the source device Memory.
  • the interface may be, for example, an external interface that receives pictures from an external video source.
  • the external video source is, for example, an external picture capture device, such as a camera, an external memory, or an external picture generation device.
  • the external picture generation device for example It is an external computer graphics processor, computer or server.
  • the interface may be any type of interface according to any proprietary or standardized interface protocol, such as a wired or wireless interface, an optical interface.
  • the picture can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of picture elements.
  • the pixels in the array can also be called sampling points.
  • the number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the array or picture defines the size and/or resolution of the picture.
  • three color components are usually used, that is, a picture can be represented or contain three sampling arrays.
  • the picture includes corresponding red, green, and blue sampling arrays.
  • each pixel is usually expressed in a luminance/chrominance format or color space. For example, for a picture in YUV format, it includes the luminance component indicated by Y (sometimes also indicated by L) and the two indicated by U and V. Chroma components.
  • the luma component Y represents luminance or gray-scale horizontal intensity (for example, both are the same in gray-scale pictures), and the two chroma components U and V represent chroma or color information components.
  • the picture in the YUV format includes a luminance sampling array of luminance sampling values (Y), and two chrominance sampling arrays of chrominance values (U and V). RGB format pictures can be converted or transformed into YUV format and vice versa, this process is also called color transformation or conversion. If the picture is black and white, the picture may include only the brightness sampling array.
  • the picture transmitted from the picture source 16 to the picture processor may also be referred to as original picture data 17.
  • the picture pre-processor 18 is configured to receive the original picture data 17 and perform pre-processing on the original picture data 17 to obtain the pre-processed picture 19 or the pre-processed picture data 19.
  • the pre-processing performed by the picture pre-processor 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (eg, conversion from RGB format to YUV format), color grading, or denoising.
  • the encoder 20 (or video encoder 20) is used to receive the pre-processed picture data 19, and process the pre-processed picture data 19 in a related prediction mode (such as the prediction mode in various embodiments herein), thereby
  • the encoded picture data 21 is provided (the structural details of the encoder 20 will be further described below based on FIG. 2 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5).
  • the encoder 20 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the image block division method described in the present application on the encoding side.
  • the communication interface 22 can be used to receive the encoded picture data 21, and can transmit the encoded picture data 21 to the destination device 14 or any other device (such as a memory) via the link 13 for storage or direct reconstruction.
  • the other device may be any device used for decoding or storage.
  • the communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to encapsulate the encoded picture data 21 into a suitable format, such as a data packet, for transmission on the link 13.
  • the destination device 14 includes a decoder 30, and optionally, the destination device 14 may further include a communication interface 28, a post-picture processor 32, and a display device 34. They are described as follows:
  • the communication interface 28 may be used to receive the encoded picture data 21 from the source device 12 or any other source, such as a storage device, such as an encoded picture data storage device.
  • the communication interface 28 can be used to transmit or receive the encoded picture data 21 through the link 13 between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or through any type of network.
  • the link 13 is, for example, a direct wired or wireless connection.
  • a network of a category is, for example, a wired or wireless network or any combination thereof, or a private network and a public network of any category, or any combination thereof.
  • the communication interface 28 may be used, for example, to decapsulate the data packet transmitted by the communication interface 22 to obtain the encoded picture data 21.
  • Both the communication interface 28 and the communication interface 22 may be configured as a one-way communication interface or a two-way communication interface, and may be used, for example, to send and receive messages to establish a connection, confirm and exchange any other communication link and/or for example encoded picture data Information about data transmission.
  • the decoder 30 (or referred to as the decoder 30) is used to receive the encoded picture data 21 and provide the decoded picture data 31 or the decoded picture 31 (hereinafter, the decoder 30 will be further described based on FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 Structural details). In some embodiments, the decoder 30 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the image block division method described in the present application on the decoding side.
  • the post-picture processor 32 is configured to perform post-processing on the decoded picture data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed picture data) to obtain post-processed picture data 33.
  • the post-processing performed by the image post-processor 32 may include: color format conversion (for example, conversion from YUV format to RGB format), color adjustment, retouching or resampling, or any other processing, and may also be used to convert the post-processed image data 33transmitted to the display device 34.
  • the display device 34 is used to receive post-processed picture data 33 to display pictures to, for example, a user or a viewer.
  • the display device 34 may be or may include any type of display for presenting reconstructed pictures, for example, an integrated or external display or monitor.
  • the display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD, Liquid) Display, an organic light emitting diode (OLED, Organic Light Emitting Diode) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS, Liquid On Crystal), Digital Light Processor (DLP, Digital Processor) or any other type of display.
  • source device 12 and the destination device 14 are illustrated as separate devices in FIG. 1A, device embodiments may also include the functionality of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and destination device 14 or corresponding functionality. In such embodiments, the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .
  • Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary devices, such as notebook or laptop computers, mobile phones, smartphones, tablets or tablet computers, cameras, desktops Computers, set-top boxes, televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any kind of operating system.
  • handheld or stationary devices such as notebook or laptop computers, mobile phones, smartphones, tablets or tablet computers, cameras, desktops Computers, set-top boxes, televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any kind of operating system.
  • Both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 can be implemented as any of various suitable circuits, for example, one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSP, Digital Processor), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC, Application- Specific Integrated (Circuit), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA, Field-Programmable Gate Array), discrete logic, hardware, or any combination thereof.
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC Application- Specific Integrated
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • the device may store the instructions of the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, and may use one or more processors to execute the instructions in hardware to perform the technology of the present application . Any one of the foregoing (including hardware, software, a combination of hardware and software, etc.) may be regarded as one or more processors.
  • the video encoding and decoding system 10 shown in FIG. 1A is only an example, and the technology of the present application may be applied to video encoding settings that do not necessarily include any data communication between encoding and decoding devices (eg, video encoding or video decoding).
  • data can be retrieved from local storage, streamed on the network, and so on.
  • the video encoding device may encode the data and store the data to the memory, and/or the video decoding device may retrieve the data from the memory and decode the data.
  • encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other but only encode data to and/or retrieve data from memory and decode the data.
  • FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of an example of a video coding system 40 including the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and/or the decoder 30 of FIG. 3, according to an exemplary embodiment.
  • the video decoding system 40 can implement a combination of various technologies in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the video decoding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, an encoder 20, a decoder 30 (and/or a video encoder/decoder implemented by the logic circuit 47 of the processing unit 46), an antenna 42 , One or more processors 43, one or more memories 44, and/or display devices 45.
  • the imaging device 41, the antenna 42, the processing unit 46, the logic circuit 47, the encoder 20, the decoder 30, the processor 43, the memory 44, and/or the display device 45 can communicate with each other.
  • the video coding system 40 is shown with the encoder 20 and the decoder 30, in different examples, the video coding system 40 may include only the encoder 20 or only the decoder 30.
  • antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bitstream of video data.
  • the display device 45 may be used to present video data.
  • the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by the processing unit 46.
  • the processing unit 46 may include ASIC logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like.
  • the video decoding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include ASIC logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like.
  • the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by hardware, such as dedicated hardware for video encoding, etc., and the processor 43 may be implemented by general-purpose software, an operating system, or the like.
  • the memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (eg, static random access memory (SRAM, Static Random Access Memory), dynamic random access memory (DRAM, Dynamic Random Access Memory), etc.) or non-volatile Memory (for example, flash memory, etc.), etc.
  • volatile memory eg, static random access memory (SRAM, Static Random Access Memory), dynamic random access memory (DRAM, Dynamic Random Access Memory), etc.
  • non-volatile Memory for example, flash memory, etc.
  • the memory 44 may be implemented by cache memory.
  • the logic circuit 47 can access the memory 44 (eg, to implement an image buffer).
  • the logic circuit 47 and/or the processing unit 46 may include memory (eg, cache, etc.) for implementing image buffers and the like.
  • the encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by the processing unit 46 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by the processing unit 46).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include the encoder 20 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • Logic circuits can be used to perform the various operations discussed herein.
  • decoder 30 may be implemented by logic circuit 47 in a similar manner to implement the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein.
  • the decoder 30 implemented by the logic circuit may include an image buffer (implemented by the processing unit 2820 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (for example, implemented by the processing unit 46).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include a decoder 30 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • antenna 42 may be used to receive an encoded bitstream of video data.
  • the encoded bitstream may include data related to encoded video frames, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc. discussed herein, such as data related to encoded partitions (eg, transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients , (As discussed) optional indicators, and/or data defining the code segmentation).
  • the video coding system 40 may also include a decoder 30 coupled to the antenna 42 and used to decode the encoded bitstream.
  • the display device 45 is used to present video frames.
  • the decoder 30 may be used to perform the reverse process.
  • the decoder 30 may be used to receive and parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly.
  • encoder 20 may entropy encode syntax elements into an encoded video bitstream. In such instances, decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly.
  • the image block division method described in the embodiment of the present application is mainly used in the image segmentation process. This process exists in both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30.
  • the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 in the embodiment of the present application may be For example, H.263, H.264, HEVV, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, VP8, VP9 and other video standard protocols or next-generation video standard protocols (such as H.266, etc.) corresponding codec/decoder.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of an encoder 20 for implementing an embodiment of the present application.
  • the encoder 20 includes a residual calculation unit 204, a transform processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, a buffer 216, a loop filter Unit 220, decoded picture buffer (DPB, Decoded Picture Buffer) 230, prediction processing unit 260, and entropy encoding unit 270.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 may include an inter prediction unit 244, an intra prediction unit 254, and a mode selection unit 262.
  • the inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown).
  • the encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a video encoder based on a hybrid video codec.
  • the residual calculation unit 204, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the prediction processing unit 260, and the entropy encoding unit 270 form the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while, for example, the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, the heavy
  • the construction unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop filter 220, the DPB 230, and the prediction processing unit 260 form the backward signal path of the encoder, where the backward signal path of the encoder corresponds to the signal path of the decoder (see FIG. 3). Decoder 30).
  • the encoder 20 receives a picture 201 or an image block 203 of the picture 201 through, for example, an input 202, for example, a picture in a picture sequence forming a video or a video sequence.
  • the image block 203 may also be called a current picture block or a picture block to be encoded
  • the picture 201 may be called a current picture or a picture to be encoded (especially when the current picture is distinguished from other pictures in video encoding, the other pictures are the same video sequence, for example That is, the previously encoded and/or decoded pictures in the video sequence of the current picture are also included).
  • An embodiment of the encoder 20 may include a division unit (not shown in FIG. 2) for dividing the picture 201 into a plurality of blocks such as image blocks 203, usually into a plurality of non-overlapping blocks.
  • the segmentation unit can be used to use the same block size and corresponding grids that define the block size for all pictures in the video sequence, or to change the block size between pictures or subsets or picture groups, and divide each picture into The corresponding block.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 of the encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the above-mentioned segmentation techniques.
  • image block 203 is also or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with sample values, although its size is smaller than picture 201.
  • the image block 203 may include, for example, one sampling array (for example, the brightness array in the case of black and white picture 201) or three sampling arrays (for example, one brightness array and two chroma arrays in the case of color picture) or An array of any other number and/or category depending on the color format applied.
  • the number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the image block 203 defines the size of the image block 203.
  • the encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode the picture 201 block by block, for example, to perform encoding and prediction on each image block 203.
  • the residual calculation unit 204 is used to calculate the residual block 205 based on the picture image block 203 and the prediction block 265 (other details of the prediction block 265 are provided below), for example, by subtracting the sample value of the picture image block 203 sample by sample (pixel by pixel) The sample values of the block 265 are depredicted to obtain the residual block 205 in the sample domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 is used to apply transforms such as discrete cosine transform (DCT, Discrete Cosine Transform) or discrete sine transform (DST, Discrete Sine Transform) to the sample values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain .
  • the transform coefficient 207 may also be called a transform residual coefficient, and represents a residual block 205 in the transform domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply integer approximations of DCT/DST, such as the transform specified by HEVC/H.265. Compared with the orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by a factor. In order to maintain the norm of the residual block processed by the forward and inverse transform, an additional scaling factor is applied as part of the transform process.
  • the scaling factor is usually selected based on certain constraints. For example, the scaling factor is a power of two used for the shift operation, the bit depth of the transform coefficient, the accuracy, and the trade-off between implementation cost, and so on.
  • a specific scaling factor can be specified for the inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the decoder 30 side (and corresponding inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the encoder 20 side), and accordingly, the encoder can be The 20 side specifies a corresponding scaling factor for the positive transform through the transform processing unit 206.
  • the quantization unit 208 is used to quantize the transform coefficient 207 by, for example, applying scalar quantization or vector quantization to obtain the quantized transform coefficient 209.
  • the quantized transform coefficient 209 may also be referred to as a quantized residual coefficient 209.
  • the quantization process can reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207. For example, n-bit transform coefficients can be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m.
  • the degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting the quantization parameter (QP, Quantization). For example, for scalar quantization, different scales can be applied to achieve thinner or coarser quantization.
  • a smaller quantization step size corresponds to a finer quantization
  • a larger quantization step size corresponds to a coarser quantization.
  • the appropriate quantization step size can be indicated by QP.
  • the quantization parameter may be an index of a predefined set of suitable quantization steps.
  • smaller quantization parameters may correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size)
  • larger quantization parameters may correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size)
  • the quantization may include dividing by the quantization step size and the corresponding quantization or inverse quantization performed by, for example, inverse quantization 210, or may include multiplying the quantization step size.
  • Embodiments according to some standards such as HEVC may use quantization parameters to determine the quantization step size.
  • the quantization step size can be calculated based on the quantization parameter using fixed-point approximation that includes equations for division. Additional scaling factors can be introduced for quantization and inverse quantization to restore the norm of the residual block that may be modified due to the scale used in the fixed-point approximation of the equations for quantization step size and quantization parameter.
  • the scale of inverse transform and inverse quantization may be combined.
  • a custom quantization table can be used and signaled from the encoder to the decoder in the bitstream, for example. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step, the greater the loss.
  • the inverse quantization unit 210 is used to apply the inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the inverse quantization coefficients 211, for example, based on or using the same quantization step size as the quantization unit 208, apply the quantization scheme applied by the quantization unit 208 Inverse quantization scheme.
  • the inverse quantized coefficient 211 may also be referred to as an inverse quantized residual coefficient 211, which corresponds to the transform coefficient 207, although the loss due to quantization is usually not the same as the transform coefficient.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to apply the inverse transform of the transform applied by the transform processing unit 206, for example, inverse DCT or inverse DST, to obtain the inverse transform block 213 in the sample domain.
  • the inverse transform block 213 may also be referred to as an inverse transform dequantized block 213 or an inverse transform residual block 213.
  • the reconstruction unit 214 (eg, summer 214) is used to add the inverse transform block 213 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 213) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the sample domain, for example, The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 213 and the sample values of the prediction block 265 are added.
  • a buffer unit 216 (or simply "buffer" 216), such as a line buffer 216, is used to buffer or store the reconstructed block 215 and corresponding sample values for, for example, intra prediction.
  • the encoder may be used to use the unfiltered reconstructed blocks and/or corresponding sample values stored in the buffer unit 216 for any type of estimation and/or prediction, such as intra prediction.
  • an embodiment of the encoder 20 may be configured such that the buffer unit 216 is used not only to store the reconstructed block 215 for intra prediction 254, but also for the loop filter unit 220 (not shown in FIG. 2) Out), and/or, for example, causing the buffer unit 216 and the decoded picture buffer unit 230 to form a buffer.
  • Other embodiments may be used to use the filtered block 221 and/or blocks or samples from the decoded picture buffer 230 (neither shown in FIG. 2) as an input or basis for intra prediction 254.
  • the loop filter unit 220 (or simply "loop filter” 220) is used to filter the reconstructed block 215 to obtain the filtered block 221, so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 220 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample adaptive offset (SAO) filter or other filters, such as a bilateral filter, a self-adapting filter Adaptive loop filter (ALF, Adaptive Loop Filter), or sharpening or smoothing filter, or collaborative filter.
  • ALF Adaptive Loop Filter
  • the loop filter unit 220 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 2, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the filtered block 221 may also be referred to as the filtered reconstructed block 221.
  • the decoded picture buffer 230 may store the reconstructed encoding block after the loop filter unit 220 performs a filtering operation on the reconstructed encoding block.
  • Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to output loop filter parameters (eg, sample adaptive offset information), for example, directly output or by the entropy encoding unit 270 or any other
  • the entropy encoding unit outputs after entropy encoding, for example, so that the decoder 30 can receive and apply the same loop filter parameters for decoding.
  • the DPB 230 may be a reference picture memory that stores reference picture data for the encoder 20 to encode video data.
  • DPB 230 can be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as DRAM (including synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), resistive RAM (resistive RAM, RRAM)), or other types Memory device.
  • the DPB 230 and the buffer 216 may be provided by the same memory device or separate memory devices.
  • DPB 230 is used to store filtered block 221.
  • DPB230 can be further used to store other previous filtered blocks of the same current picture or different pictures such as previous reconstructed pictures, such as previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and can provide a complete previous reconstructed ie.
  • the DPB 230 is used to store the reconstructed block 215.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 also known as the block prediction processing unit 260, is used to receive or acquire the image block 203 (current image block 203 of the current picture 201) and reconstructed picture data, such as the same (current) picture from the buffer 216 Reference samples and/or reference picture data 231 of one or more previously decoded pictures from the decoded picture buffer 230, and used to process such data for prediction, that is, to provide an inter prediction block 245 or The prediction block 265 of the intra prediction block 255.
  • the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction mode) and/or the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
  • a prediction mode eg, intra or inter prediction mode
  • the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
  • An embodiment of the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (for example, from those prediction modes supported by the prediction processing unit 260), which provides the best match or the minimum residual (the minimum residual means Better compression in transmission or storage), or provide minimum signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead means better compression in transmission or storage), or consider or balance both at the same time.
  • the mode selection unit 262 may be used to determine a prediction mode based on rate distortion optimization (RDO, Rate Distortion Optimization), that is, select a prediction mode that provides minimum bit rate distortion optimization, or select a prediction mode in which the related rate distortion at least meets the prediction mode selection criteria .
  • rate distortion optimization Rate Distortion Optimization
  • the encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from the (predetermined) prediction mode set.
  • the set of prediction modes may include, for example, intra prediction modes and/or inter prediction modes.
  • the intra prediction mode set may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.265, or may include 67 Different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.
  • non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode
  • directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.
  • the set of inter prediction modes depends on the available reference pictures (ie, for example, the aforementioned at least partially decoded pictures stored in DBP 230) and other inter prediction parameters, for example, depending on whether the entire reference picture is used or only Use a part of the reference picture, for example a search window area surrounding the area of the current image block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or for example depending on whether to apply inter-pixel interpolation such as half-pixel and/or quarter-pixel interpolation Interpolation, the set of inter prediction modes may include, for example, Advanced Motion Vector (AMVP, Advanced Vector) Prediction) mode and merge mode.
  • AMVP Advanced Motion Vector
  • the set of inter prediction modes may include an improved control point-based AMVP mode according to an embodiment of the present application, and an improved control point-based merge mode.
  • the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques described below.
  • the embodiments of the present application may also apply skip mode and/or direct mode.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 may be further used to divide the image block 203 into smaller block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, iteratively using QT, BT, or Triple-Tree (TT), or any combination thereof, And for, for example, performing prediction for each of the block partitions or sub-blocks, where mode selection includes selecting a tree structure of the divided image block 203 and selecting a prediction mode applied to each of the block partitions or sub-blocks.
  • mode selection includes selecting a tree structure of the divided image block 203 and selecting a prediction mode applied to each of the block partitions or sub-blocks.
  • the inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME, Motion) unit (not shown in FIG. 2) and a motion compensation (MC, Motion Compensation) unit (not shown in FIG. 2).
  • the motion estimation unit is used to receive or acquire a picture image block 203 (current picture image block 203 of the current picture 201) and a decoded picture 231, or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example, one or more other/different
  • the reconstructed block of the previously decoded picture 231 is used for motion estimation.
  • the video sequence may include the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31, or in other words, the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31 may be part of the picture sequence forming the video sequence, or form the picture sequence.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to select a reference block from multiple reference blocks of the same or different pictures in multiple other pictures, and provide a reference picture and/or provide a reference to a motion estimation unit (not shown in FIG. 2)
  • the offset (spatial offset) between the position of the block (X, Y coordinates) and the position of the current image block is used as an inter prediction parameter.
  • This offset is also called Motion Vector (MV, Motion Vector).
  • the motion compensation unit is used to acquire inter prediction parameters, and perform inter prediction based on or using inter prediction parameters to obtain inter prediction blocks 245.
  • the motion compensation performed by the motion compensation unit may include extracting or generating a prediction block based on a motion/block vector determined by motion estimation (possibly performing interpolation of sub-pixel accuracy). Interpolation filtering can generate additional pixel samples from known pixel samples, potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode picture blocks.
  • the motion compensation unit 246 may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in a reference picture list. Motion compensation unit 246 may also generate syntax elements associated with blocks and video slices for use by decoder 30 when decoding picture blocks of video slices.
  • the above-mentioned inter prediction unit 244 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes inter prediction parameters (such as traversing multiple inter prediction modes to select an inter prediction mode used for current image block prediction Instructions).
  • the inter prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element.
  • the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding. It can be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques.
  • the intra prediction unit 254 is used to acquire, for example, a picture block 203 (current picture block) that receives the same picture and one or more previously reconstructed blocks, such as reconstructed neighboring blocks, for intra estimation.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode from a plurality of (predetermined) intra prediction modes.
  • Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode based on optimization criteria, for example, based on a minimum residual (eg, an intra prediction mode that provides the prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or minimum rate distortion.
  • a minimum residual eg, an intra prediction mode that provides the prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203
  • minimum rate distortion e.g., a minimum rate distortion
  • the intra prediction unit 254 is further used to determine the intra prediction block 255 based on the intra prediction parameters of the intra prediction mode as selected. In any case, after selecting the intra-prediction mode for the block, the intra-prediction unit 254 is also used to provide the intra-prediction parameters to the entropy encoding unit 270, that is, to provide an indication of the selected intra-prediction mode for the block Information. In one example, intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of intra prediction techniques.
  • the above-mentioned intra-prediction unit 254 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes intra-prediction parameters (such as traversing multiple intra-prediction modes to select an intra-prediction mode for prediction of the current image block Instructions).
  • the intra prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element.
  • the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding.
  • the entropy coding unit 270 is used to entropy coding algorithms or schemes (for example, variable length coding (VLC, Variable) Coding) schemes, context adaptive VLC (CAVLC, Context Adaptive VLC) schemes, arithmetic coding schemes, context adaptive binary arithmetic Coding (CABAC, Context Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding), grammar-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding (SBAC, Syntax-Based context-adaptive binary Arithmetic Coding), probability interval segmentation entropy (PIPE, Probability Interval Partitioning Entropy) coding or other entropy Coding method or technique) applied to a single or all of the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or loop filter parameters (or not applied) to obtain the output 272 to For example, the encoded picture data 21 output in the form of an encoded bit stream 21.
  • VLC variable length coding
  • CAVLC Context Adaptive VLC
  • the encoded bitstream may be transmitted to the video decoder 30 or archived for later transmission or retrieval by the video decoder 30.
  • the entropy encoding unit 270 may also be used to entropy encode other syntax elements of the current video slice being encoded.
  • video encoder 20 may be used to encode video streams.
  • the non-transform based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without the transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames.
  • the encoder 20 may have a quantization unit 208 and an inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to implement the image block division method described in the embodiments below.
  • the video encoder 20 can directly quantize the residual signal without processing by the transform processing unit 206, and accordingly, without processing by the inverse transform processing unit 212; or, for some For image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 does not generate residual data, and accordingly does not need to be processed by the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212; or, the video encoder 20 may convert The reconstructed image block is directly stored as a reference block without being processed by the filter 220; alternatively, the quantization unit 208 and the inverse quantization unit 210 in the video encoder 20 may be merged together.
  • the loop filter 220 is optional, and in the case of lossless compression coding, the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212 are optional. It should be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 and the intra prediction unit 254 may be selectively enabled according to different application scenarios.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of a decoder 30 for implementing an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video decoder 30 is used to receive encoded picture data (eg, encoded bitstream) 21, for example, encoded by the encoder 20, to obtain the decoded picture 231.
  • encoded picture data eg, encoded bitstream
  • video decoder 30 receives video data from video encoder 20, such as an encoded video bitstream and associated syntax elements representing picture blocks of the encoded video slice.
  • the decoder 30 includes an entropy decoding unit 304, an inverse quantization unit 310, an inverse transform processing unit 312, a reconstruction unit 314 (such as a summer 314), a buffer 316, a loop filter 320, a The decoded picture buffer 330 and the prediction processing unit 360.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344, an intra prediction unit 354, and a mode selection unit 362.
  • video decoder 30 may perform a decoding pass that is generally inverse to the encoding pass described with reference to video encoder 20 of FIG. 2.
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is used to perform entropy decoding on the encoded picture data 21 to obtain, for example, quantized coefficients 309 and/or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3), for example, inter prediction, intra prediction parameters , Any or all of the loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements (decoded).
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is further used to forward inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or other syntax elements to the prediction processing unit 360.
  • Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice level and/or the video block level.
  • the inverse quantization unit 310 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110
  • the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally the same as the inverse transform processing unit 212
  • the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214
  • the buffer 316 may be functionally
  • the loop filter 320 may be functionally the same as the loop filter 220
  • the decoded picture buffer 330 may be functionally the same as the decoded picture buffer 230.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354, wherein the inter prediction unit 344 may be similar in function to the inter prediction unit 244, and the intra prediction unit 354 may be similar in function to the intra prediction unit 254 .
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is generally used to perform block prediction and/or obtain the prediction block 365 from the encoded data 21, and receive or obtain prediction-related parameters and/or information about the entropy decoding unit 304 (explicitly or implicitly). Information about the selected prediction mode.
  • the intra prediction unit 354 of the prediction processing unit 360 is used to signal-based the intra prediction mode and the previous decoded block from the current frame or picture. Data to generate a prediction block 365 for the picture block of the current video slice.
  • the inter prediction unit 344 eg, motion compensation unit
  • Other syntax elements generate a prediction block 365 for the video block of the current video slice.
  • a prediction block may be generated from a reference picture in a reference picture list.
  • the video decoder 30 may construct the reference frame lists: list 0 and list 1 based on the reference pictures stored in the DPB 330 using default construction techniques.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is used to determine the prediction information for the video block of the current video slice by parsing the motion vector and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate the prediction block for the current video block being decoded.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 uses some received syntax elements to determine the prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction) of the video block used to encode the video slice, and the inter prediction slice type ( For example, B slice, P slice, or GPB slice), construction information of one or more of the reference picture lists for slices, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block for slices, The inter prediction status and other information of each inter-coded video block of the slice to decode the video block of the current video slice.
  • the prediction mode eg, intra or inter prediction
  • the inter prediction slice type For example, B slice, P slice, or GPB slice
  • the syntax elements received by the video decoder 30 from the bitstream include receiving an adaptive parameter set (APS, Adaptive Parameter Set), sequence parameter set (SPS, Sequence Parameter Set), and picture parameter set (PPS , Picture, Parameter, or one or more of the syntax elements in the stripe header.
  • APS adaptive parameter set
  • SPS Sequence Parameter Set
  • PPS picture parameter set
  • Picture Parameter, or one or more of the syntax elements in the stripe header.
  • the inverse quantization unit 310 may be used to inverse quantize (ie, inverse quantize) the quantized transform coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304.
  • the inverse quantization process may include using the quantization parameters calculated by the video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization that should be applied and also determine the degree of inverse quantization that should be applied.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 312 is used to apply an inverse transform (eg, inverse DCT, inverse integer transform, or conceptually similar inverse transform process) to the transform coefficients, so as to generate a residual block in the pixel domain.
  • an inverse transform eg, inverse DCT, inverse integer transform, or conceptually similar inverse transform process
  • the reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314) is used to add the inverse transform block 313 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 313) to the prediction block 365 to obtain the reconstructed block 315 in the sample domain, for example by The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 313 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 365.
  • the loop filter unit 320 (during the encoding loop or after the encoding loop) is used to filter the reconstructed block 315 to obtain the filtered block 321 to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 320 may be used to perform any combination of filtering techniques described below.
  • the loop filter unit 320 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, SAO filters, or other filters, such as bilateral filters, ALF, or sharpening or smoothing filters, or collaborative filtering Device.
  • the loop filter unit 320 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 3, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the decoded video block 321 in a given frame or picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 that stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation.
  • the decoder 30 is used, for example, to output the decoded picture 31 through the output 332 for presentation to the user or for the user to view.
  • video decoder 30 may be used to decode the compressed bitstream.
  • the decoder 30 may generate the output video stream without the loop filter unit 320.
  • the non-transform based decoder 30 may directly inversely quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames.
  • the video decoder 30 may have an inverse quantization unit 310 and an inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
  • the decoder 30 is used to implement the image block division method described in the embodiment below.
  • video decoder 30 may be used to decode the encoded video bitstream.
  • the video decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without processing by the filter 320; or, for certain image blocks or image frames, the entropy decoding unit 304 of the video decoder 30 does not decode the quantized coefficients, and accordingly does not It needs to be processed by the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312.
  • the loop filter 320 is optional; and in the case of lossless compression, the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312 are optional.
  • the inter prediction unit and the intra prediction unit may be selectively enabled.
  • the processing results for a certain link can be further processed and output to the next link, for example, in interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering, etc. After the link, the results of the corresponding link are further clipped or shift shifted.
  • the motion vector of the control point of the current image block derived from the motion vector of the adjacent affine coding block, or the motion vector of the sub-block of the current image block derived may be further processed, and this application does not limited.
  • the value range of the motion vector is constrained to be within a certain bit width. Assuming that the allowed bit width of the motion vector is bitDepth, the range of the motion vector is -2 ⁇ (bitDepth-1) ⁇ 2 ⁇ (bitDepth-1)-1, where the “ ⁇ ” symbol represents the power. If bitDepth is 16, the value range is -32768 ⁇ 32767. If bitDepth is 18, the value ranges from -131072 to 131071.
  • the value of the motion vector (such as the motion vectors MV of four 4x4 sub-blocks in an 8x8 image block) is constrained so that the maximum difference between the integer parts of the four 4 ⁇ 4 sub-blocks MV No more than N pixels, for example no more than one pixel.
  • ux (vx+2 bitDepth )%2 bitDepth
  • vx is the horizontal component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block
  • vy is the vertical component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block
  • ux and uy are intermediate values
  • bitDepth represents the bit width
  • the value of vx is -32769, and the value obtained by the above formula is 32767. Because in the computer, the value is stored in the form of two's complement, the complement of -32769 is 1,0111,1111,1111,1111 (17 bits), the computer handles the overflow as discarding the high bit, then the value of vx If it is 0111,1111,1111,1111, it is 32767, which is consistent with the result obtained by formula processing.
  • vx Clip3 (-2 bitDepth-1 , 2 bitDepth-1 -1, vx)
  • vy Clip3 (-2 bitDepth-1 , 2 bitDepth-1 -1, vy)
  • vx is the horizontal component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block
  • vy is the vertical component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block
  • x, y, and z correspond to the MV clamp
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoding device 400 (for example, a video encoding device 400 or a video decoding device 400) provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video coding apparatus 400 is suitable for implementing the embodiments described herein.
  • the video coding device 400 may be a video decoder (eg, decoder 30 of FIG. 1A) or a video encoder (eg, encoder 20 of FIG. 1A).
  • the video decoding device 400 may be one or more components in the decoder 30 of FIG. 1A or the encoder 20 of FIG. 1A described above.
  • the video decoding device 400 includes: an inlet port 410 for receiving data and a receiving unit (Rx) 420, a processor for processing data, a logic unit or a central processing unit (CPU) 430, and a transmitter unit for transmitting data (Tx) 440 and exit port 450, and a memory 460 for storing data.
  • the video decoding device 400 may further include a photoelectric conversion component and an electro-optical (EO) component coupled to the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, and the outlet port 450 for the outlet or inlet of the optical signal or the electrical signal.
  • EO electro-optical
  • the processor 430 is implemented by hardware and software.
  • the processor 430 may be implemented as one or more CPU chips, cores (eg, multi-core processors), FPGA, ASIC, and DSP.
  • the processor 430 communicates with the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, the outlet port 450, and the memory 460.
  • the processor 430 includes a decoding module 470 (for example, an encoding module 470 or a decoding module 470).
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 implements the embodiments disclosed herein to implement the chroma block prediction method provided by the embodiments of the present application. For example, the encoding/decoding module 470 implements, processes, or provides various encoding operations.
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 provides a substantial improvement to the function of the video decoding device 400 and affects the conversion of the video decoding device 400 to different states.
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 is implemented with instructions stored in the memory 460 and executed by the processor 430.
  • the memory 460 includes one or more magnetic disks, tape drives, and solid-state hard disks, and can be used as an overflow data storage device for storing programs when these programs are selectively executed, as well as instructions and data read during program execution.
  • the memory 460 may be volatile and/or non-volatile, and may be read only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), random access memory (TCAM, Ternary Content-Addressable Memory) and/or static Random Access Memory (SRAM).
  • FIG. 5 is a simplified block diagram of an apparatus 500 that can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1A according to an exemplary embodiment.
  • the device 500 can implement the technology of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of an implementation manner of an encoding device or a decoding device (referred to simply as a decoding device 500) according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the decoding device 500 may include a processor 510, a memory 530, and a bus system 550.
  • the processor and the memory are connected through a bus system, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory.
  • the memory of the decoding device stores the program code, and the processor can call the program code stored in the memory to perform various video encoding or decoding methods described in this application, especially various new image block division methods. In order to avoid repetition, they are not described in detail here.
  • the processor 510 may be a central processing unit (CPU, Central Processing Unit), and the processor 510 may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs) , Off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory 530 may include a read only memory (ROM) device or a random access memory (RAM) device. Any other suitable type of storage device may also be used as the memory 530.
  • the memory 530 may include code and data 531 accessed by the processor 510 using the bus 550.
  • the memory 530 may further include an operating system 533 and an application program 535 including at least one program that allows the processor 510 to perform the video encoding or decoding method described in the present application (in particular, the image block division method described in the present application).
  • the application program 535 may include applications 1 to N, which further include a video encoding or decoding application (referred to as a video coding application for short) that performs the video encoding or decoding method described in this application.
  • the bus system 550 may also include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clarity, various buses are marked as the bus system 550 in the figure.
  • the decoding device 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as a display 570.
  • the display 570 may be a tactile display that merges the display with a tactile unit that operably senses touch input.
  • the display 570 may be connected to the processor 510 via the bus 550.
  • the video coding standard divides a frame of images into non-overlapping coding tree units (CTU).
  • the size of a CTU can be set to 64 ⁇ 64 (the size of the CTU can also be set to other values, such as the CTU size increased to 128 ⁇ 128 Or 256 ⁇ 256, etc.).
  • a 64 ⁇ 64 CTU contains a rectangular pixel lattice of 64 pixels in each column and each pixel contains a luminance component or/and a chrominance component. Next, further divide in CTU units.
  • BT-based division methods such as horizontal binary tree (HBT, Horizontal Binary Tree), vertical binary tree (VBT, Vertical Binary Tree) division method; you can also Use the division method based on Quad Tree (QT, Quad); You can also use the division method based on Triple-Tree (TT, Triple-Tree); You can also use the division method of Extended Quad Tree (EQT, Extended Tree) , Such as the division method based on the horizontally expanded quadtree (HEQT, Horizontal Extended Tree), and the vertically expanded quadtree (VEQT, Vertical Extended Tree).
  • HBT Horizontal Binary Tree
  • VBT Vertical Binary Tree division method
  • QT Quad Tree
  • Triple-Tree Triple-Tree
  • EQT Extended Quad Tree
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the BT, QT, and EQT division modes in the embodiment of the present application. With reference to FIG. 6, the following uses the decoding side to divide an image block as an example to describe the foregoing several division modes.
  • a frame of image can be divided into multiple non-overlapping CTUs.
  • the CTU can be used as the root node of the quadtree, and the CTU is recursively divided into several leaf nodes according to the division method of the quadtree.
  • a node corresponds to an image area, that is, an image block.
  • the node is called a leaf node, and the image area corresponding to it forms a CU; if the node continues to divide, the image corresponding to the node
  • the area is divided into four sub-areas of the same size as shown in Figure 6(a) (its width and height are each half of the divided area), each sub-area corresponds to a sub-node, and it is necessary to determine whether these sub-nodes are Will continue to divide. Whether a node is divided is indicated by the split flag bit split_cu_flag corresponding to this node in the code stream.
  • the quad-tree level (qtDepth) of the root node is 0, and the quad-tree level of the child node is the quad-tree level of the parent node plus one.
  • the size and shape of the node in the following refers to the size and shape of the image area corresponding to the node.
  • the BT division method is to divide a node into two sub-nodes.
  • the EQT division method is to divide a node into 4 child nodes. There are two specific EQT division methods:
  • HEQT the area corresponding to the node is divided into three sub-areas of upper, middle and lower, and the middle sub-area is divided into two sub-areas of middle left and right, each sub-area corresponds to a sub-node, among which The heights of the center left, center right, and bottom four subregions are 1/4, 1/2, 1/2, 1/4 of the node height, and the width of the center left and center right are 1/2, 1/2 of the node height , As shown in Fig.
  • VEQT divide the area corresponding to the node into three areas of left, center and right, and vertically divide the middle sub-area into two sub-areas of upper middle and lower middle, Each area corresponds to a node, where the widths of the four sub-areas of left, middle upper, middle lower, and right are 1/4, 1/2, 1/2, 1/4 of the node height, and the width of the middle upper and lower middle It is 1/2 and 1/2 of the node height, as shown in Figure 6(e).
  • QT concatenated BT/EQT is also used, that is, the nodes on the first-level coding tree can only be divided into child nodes using QT, and the leaf nodes of the first-level coding tree are the root nodes of the second-level coding tree
  • the nodes on the second-level coding tree can be divided into child nodes using one of the BT or EQT division methods; the leaf nodes of the second-level coding tree are coding units. It should be noted that when a leaf node is divided into BT or EQT, its leaf nodes can only use BT or EQT, but not QT.
  • VTM Versatile Video Coding Test Model
  • the TT division method is to divide a node into three sub-nodes.
  • VTM uses the division method of QT cascaded BT/TT, referred to as QT-MTT (Quad Tree Plus plus Multi-Type Tree) division method. More specifically, the CTU generates QT child nodes through QT division. The child nodes in QT can be further divided into four QT child nodes using QT division, or no longer generate a QT leaf node. Then, the QT leaf node is used as the root node of the MTT, and one of the four division methods of HBT, VBT, HTT, and VTT is used to divide into child nodes, or no longer divided into an MTT leaf node. The leaf node of MTT corresponds to a CU.
  • QT-MTT Quad Tree Plus plus Multi-Type Tree
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a division method based on QT-MTT in an embodiment of the present application.
  • each endpoint in the right diagram of FIG. 7 represents a node, and a node is connected with 4 lines Indicates QT division, 2 lines connected to one node represent BT division, and 3 lines connected to one node represent TT division.
  • the solid line represents the QT division
  • the dashed line represents the first layer division of the multi-type division (MTT, Multi-Type Tree)
  • the dot-and-dash line represents the second layer division of the MTT.
  • a to p are 16 MTT leaf nodes, and each MTT leaf node corresponds to a CU.
  • a CTU is divided into 16 CUs such as a to p based on the QT-MTT division method according to the division method of the right diagram in FIG. 7 to obtain the CU division diagram shown in the left diagram of FIG. 7.
  • each CU has a QT depth (QT depth), also called QT depth, and an MTT depth (MTT depth), also called MTT depth.
  • QT depth QT depth
  • MTT depth MTT depth
  • the QT level represents the QT level of the QT leaf node to which the CU belongs
  • the MTT level represents the MTT level of the MTT leaf node to which the CU belongs.
  • the QT level of the root node of the coding tree is 0, and the MTT level is 0.
  • the QT level of the divided child node is the QT level of the node plus 1, the MTT level remains unchanged; similarly, if a node on the coding tree uses MTT division (ie BT or TT One of the divisions), the MTT level of the child node obtained by the division is the MTT level of the node plus 1, and the QT level remains unchanged.
  • MTT division ie BT or TT One of the divisions
  • the QT level of a, b, c, d, e, f, g, i, j is 1, and the MTT level is 2; the QT level of h is 1, and the MTT level is 1; n, o, p The QT level is 2, and the MTT level is 0; the QT level of l and m is 2, and the MTTT level is 1. If the CTU is divided into only one CU, the QT level of this CU is 0 and the MTT level is 0.
  • one node corresponds to one image block
  • the image block corresponding to one leaf node is CU.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide an image block division method, which can be applied to the encoding process of the encoder or the decoding process of the decoder.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation process of an image block division method in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8, the image block division method includes:.
  • the above-mentioned current image block is an image block divided by the current image, corresponding to a node on the coding tree of the current image.
  • the current image block may be a CTU of the current image, or may be a CTU as the root node
  • the sub-block obtained by division may also be a sub-block of the next level obtained by dividing a sub-block of one level as a root node.
  • the block information of the current image block may include the size information of the current image block, such as the width and height of the current image block, and may also include the coordinates of the pixels in the current image block. Here, the coordinates of the pixels are relative to the upper left vertex of the current image.
  • the block information can be the image-related information corresponding to the current image block.
  • These block information can be derived from the current image, such as the current image during the process of image block division, by the size of the current image. The information is derived from, or parsed from the code stream.
  • the decoding end parses the code stream to obtain the block information of the corresponding current image block therefrom. If the encoding end implements S801, the encoding end may obtain the block information of the current image block from the image information of the current image, for example, the coordinates of the pixel points in the current image block according to the coordinates of the pixel points in the current image, Then, the width and/or height of the current image block are calculated.
  • the boundary of the current image may include but is not limited to: the right boundary and/or the lower boundary of the current image.
  • S802 According to the block information, determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image
  • the above-mentioned current image block beyond the current image boundary does not mean that there are still pixel values in the current image block beyond the image boundary, but it refers to the current image block in a certain direction or two directions
  • the maximum coordinate value exceeds the coordinate value of the image boundary along the same direction.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the current image block exceeding the current image boundary in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the dotted line indicates that the current image block may exceed the boundary of the current image, where the positive direction of the horizontal axis is to the right , The positive direction of the vertical axis is downward, the current image block 91 represents the image block beyond the right boundary of the current image 90, the current image block 92 represents the image block beyond the lower boundary of the current image 90, and the current image block 93 represents the image block beyond the current image 90
  • the image block at the lower right boundary that is, the current image block exceeds the right and lower boundaries of the current image).
  • the decoding side may determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image according to the obtained block information, such as the coordinates of pixels in the current image block. Then, S802 may include: obtaining the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block according to the block information; determining whether the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy the preset condition, if the coordinates of the pixel (x , Y) meets the first preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the second preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the pixel
  • the coordinates (x, y) satisfy the third preset condition, which indicates that the pixel point exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
  • the above pixel points are used to represent the current image block, and specific pixel points in the current image block can be selected to represent the current image block, such as the pixel points of each vertex of the current image block, such as the pixel point of the upper left vertex, the upper right
  • the pixel point of the vertex, the pixel point of the lower left vertex or the pixel point of the lower right vertex you can also select the pixel point of the center position of the current image block.
  • By comparing the coordinates of these pixel points with the coordinates of the boundary of the current image it can be determined whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image.
  • any pixel in the current image block can also be selected and used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image.
  • the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel points are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image; accordingly, the first preset condition may be: a pixel The coordinates (x, y) satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH ⁇ picH; the above second preset condition may be: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW ⁇ picW, and y+cH >picH; the above third preset condition may be: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH; where cW is the width of the current image block and cH is the current image block Height, picW is the width of the current image, picH is the height of the current image.
  • the forced division method is determined for the current image block according to the specific exceeding situation.
  • the forced division method refers to that the division method of the current image block does not need to be obtained by parsing the code stream, and the current image block is directly divided using the forced division method.
  • S803 may include: comparing the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold to determine a correspondence for the current image block
  • the forced division mode of the image that is, the size information of the current image block is compared with a preset threshold, and the corresponding forced division mode is determined for the current image block according to the comparison result.
  • the above-mentioned preset threshold may be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or a high-level syntax element (eg, sequence parameter set (SPS, Sequence Parameter Set), image) in the code stream from the decoding end
  • SPS Sequence Parameter Set
  • image e.g., sequence parameter set (SPS, Sequence Parameter Set), image
  • PPS Picture, Set
  • slice header parse header
  • the value of the preset threshold may be different according to actual needs, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit it.
  • S803 may and is not limited to be implemented according to the following method:
  • the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold K (that is, the first preset threshold), and the height of the current image block is greater than the threshold K, it can be determined that the current image block is forced to comply with HBT
  • the division method is divided, that is to say, the mandatory division method of the current image block is the HBT division method; otherwise, if the width of the current image block is not equal to the threshold K, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the threshold K, you can determine the current
  • the image blocks are forcibly divided according to the VBT division mode, that is to say, the forced division mode of the current image block is determined as the VBT division mode.
  • the threshold K is a positive integer
  • the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is greater than the threshold K, and the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold K, it can be determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, that is to say determined
  • the forced division method of the current image block is the division method of VBT; otherwise, if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the threshold K, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the threshold K, it can be determined that the current image block is forcedly divided according to HBT Division, that is to say, the forced division mode of the current image block is the division mode of HBT.
  • the above threshold K (that is, the first preset threshold) can be set in the video encoder or video decoder (for example, set to 64), or the video decoder can extract high-level syntax elements (for example, SPS, PPS or slice header).
  • the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold M (ie, the second preset threshold), and the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold L (ie, the third preset threshold), then It is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, that is to say, the forced division method of the current image block is the HBT division method; otherwise, if the width of the current image block is not equal to the threshold M and the height of the current image block is not equal to Threshold L, it can be determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division mode, that is to say, the forced division mode of the current image block is the VBT division mode; here, the threshold M is smaller than the threshold L.
  • the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold M and the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold L, it can be determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, that is to say determined
  • the forced division of the current image block is the division of VBT; otherwise, if the height of the current image block is not equal to the threshold M and the width of the current image block is not equal to the threshold L, it can be determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method That is to say, the forced division method of the current image block is determined as the HBT division method.
  • Both the threshold M and the threshold L can be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or can be parsed by the decoding end from high-level syntax elements (for example, SPS, PPS, or slice header) in the code stream.
  • the threshold M may be an integer greater than or equal to 32, for example, the threshold M is 64 and the threshold L is 128; the threshold M may be 32 and the threshold L is 128.
  • the values of the threshold value M and the threshold value L may have other situations, as long as the condition that the threshold value M is smaller than the threshold value L can be satisfied, and the embodiments of the present application are not specifically limited.
  • the current image block can be determined It is forcibly divided according to the QT division mode, that is to say, the forced division mode of the current image block is determined as the QT division mode.
  • the values of the threshold K, the threshold M and the threshold L can be set according to the needs of actual image division, and are not limited to the above examples.
  • the above-mentioned mandatory division method for the current image block can be and is not limited to one or more of the cascade of HBT, VBT, QT, HEQT and VEQT.
  • HBT and VBT belong to the BT division method
  • HEQT and VEQT belong to the specific application of EQT division.
  • QT concatenated BT/EQT is used, that is, the nodes on the first level coding tree can only be divided into child nodes using QT, and the child nodes of the first level coding tree are the second level coding tree
  • the root node of the second level coding tree can be divided into child nodes using one of the BT or EQT division methods. It should be noted that when a child node uses BT or EQT division, its child nodes can only use BT or EQT division, but not QT division.
  • the current image block is forcedly divided according to the determined forced division mode to obtain multiple sub-blocks.
  • the decoding end can perform S801 to S804 for each of these sub-blocks, and so on, until all the sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time, the decoding end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, The image area corresponding to these leaf nodes is the CU. Then, the decoding end parses and obtains the syntax elements corresponding to each CU from the code stream, obtains the prediction information and residual information of each CU and each sub-region, and can perform inter-frame on each sub-region according to the corresponding prediction information of each sub-region The prediction process or the intra prediction process obtains the inter prediction block or the intra prediction block of each sub-region.
  • the transform coefficients are subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing to obtain a residual block, which is superimposed on the prediction block of the corresponding sub-region to generate a reconstructed block, that is, to reconstruct the current image block.
  • S801 to S804 may also be performed for each of these sub-blocks, and so on, until all sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time encoding
  • the end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, and the image area corresponding to these leaf nodes is the CU.
  • the encoding end performs prediction processing on each CU to obtain the corresponding prediction block, and then obtains the corresponding residual block according to the current image block and the prediction block, and then entropy encodes the residual block to generate the corresponding code stream. To encode the current image block.
  • the current image block when the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, it is more complicated to encode and decode the current image block. Therefore, in order to reduce the calculation complexity of the encoding and decoding, the image blocks beyond the boundary of the current image are taken If the above image block division methods described in S801 to S804 are used; and for image blocks that do not exceed the boundary of the current image, the final division method can be determined from the division methods allowed for the current image block, and the final division method The current image block is divided; or, the syntax element of the current image block is obtained by parsing from the code stream, and the current image block is divided according to the division manner indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block.
  • the division method in the following embodiments may also be implemented to further reduce the calculation complexity of the video sequence codec and improve the compression performance, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the decoding end may determine the final division method from the division methods allowed by the current image block by parsing the code stream. For example, the decoding end may determine the division methods allowed by the current image block, and then, according to These current image blocks are allowed to be divided into two bins (ie split_cu_flag, bt_split_flag, bqt_split_type_flag and bqt_split_dir_flag, or the sequence is split_cu_flag, bt_split_flag, bqt_split_split_flag and bqt according to the code and bqt). Analyze the binarized bin of the divided information to determine the final division method of the current image block.
  • two bins ie split_cu_flag, bt_split_flag, bqt_split_type_flag and bqt_split_dir_flag, or the sequence is split_cu_flag
  • split_cu_flag is 1, it means that the current image block is allowed to use QT division, split_cu_flag is 0, it means that the current image block is not allowed to use QT division; bt_split_flag is 1, it means that the current image block is allowed to use EQT or BT division, bt_split_flag is 0 , It means that the current image block is not allowed to use EQT and BT division; bqt_split_type_flag is 1, it means that the current image block is allowed to use BT division, bqt_split_type_flag is 0, it means that the current image block is allowed to use EQT division; bqt_split_dir_flag is 1, it means the current image Blocks are allowed to use vertical division, bqt_split_dir_flag is 0, it means that the current image block is allowed to use horizontal division.
  • the decoder does not need to parse split_cu_flag from the code stream; otherwise, the decoder parses split_cu_flag from the code stream; if split_cu_flag is 1, it means that the current image block allows QT Division, at this time, determine QT as the final division of the current image block; if split_cu_flag is 0, the decoder continues to parse bt_split_flag, if bt_split_flag is 0, the expression of the current image block is not allowed to use EQT and BT division, you do not need to continue Analyze bqt_split_type_flag and bqt_split_dir_flag to directly determine that the current image block is not divided; if bt_split_flag is 1, it indicates that the current image block allows EQT or BT division.
  • the decoding end parses bqt_split_type_flag and bqt_split_dir_flag from the code stream in sequence (the parsing order can be parsing bqt_split_type_flag, then parsing bqt_split_dir_flag; parsing bqt_split_blit_qg, parsing ); If the current image block allows to use one to three of the above four divisions, the bqt_split_dir_flag and/or bqt_split_type_flag of the current image block need not be parsed from the code stream, but can be directly exported. Thus, the final division method of the current image block can be determined, and the current image block can be divided according to the final
  • the current image when scanning according to the zigzag (Zigzag), when an image block in the current image is scanned, that is, the current image block, the current image block is parsed from the code stream Block information, and then, based on these block information, determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, and determine the forced division method for the current image block that exceeds the boundary of the current image, and perform the forced division in this way to avoid the encoding end being
  • Embodiment 2 of this application is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 2 of this application:
  • the above method further includes:
  • S805 may include: according to the size information, such as the width and height of the current image block, calculate the ratio of the width and height of the current image block; If the ratio is greater than the fourth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method.
  • the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer; if the ratio is less than the fifth preset threshold, the ratio of the height and width of the current image block is greater than The fourth preset threshold determines that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, and the fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
  • the above fourth preset threshold can be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or can also be parsed from high-level syntax elements (for example, SPS, PPS, or slice header) in the code stream.
  • the fourth preset threshold may take a maximum ratio maxRatio, for example, 4 or 8.
  • the fifth preset threshold can be calculated by taking the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold, then, the fifth preset threshold can be 1/maxRatio, with a value range of (0, 1), such as 1/4 or 1/8.
  • the above S805 may also include: Determine whether the current image block is an I slice or I frame; determine whether the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset threshold.
  • the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer; if the current If the image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
  • the sixth preset threshold may be set in the video encoder or video decoder (for example, set to 128 or 256), or high-level syntax elements (for example, SPS, PPS or slice header) parsed.
  • the image block is an I slice (slice) or all CUs in an I frame (frame) can only be encoded using intra prediction.
  • the current image block is forcedly divided according to the determined forced division mode to obtain multiple sub-blocks.
  • the decoding end can perform S801 to S806 for each of these sub-blocks, and so on, until all the sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time, the decoding end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, The image area corresponding to these leaf nodes is the CU. Then, the decoding end parses and obtains the syntax element corresponding to each CU from the code stream, and performs a decoding operation on the CU to obtain a reconstruction signal corresponding to the current image block, that is, to reconstruct the current image block.
  • S801 to S806 may also be performed for each of these sub-blocks, and so on, until all sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time decoding
  • the end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, and the image area corresponding to these leaf nodes is the CU.
  • the coding end performs prediction processing, transformation processing, quantization processing, and entropy coding processing on each CU to realize coding of the current image block.
  • the above method can be used to determine the forced division mode corresponding to the current image block that does not exceed the boundary of the current image.
  • the decoding end can also determine the division method for the current image block in the following manner, for example, determine the final division method from the division methods allowed for the current image block, and follow the final division method Divide the current image block; or, parse out the syntax element corresponding to the current image block from the code stream, and divide the current image block according to the division method indicated by the syntax element.
  • the division method allowed for the image block is a legal division method for decoding.
  • a node is allowed to use VBT division, HBT division, VEQT division, HEQT division, QT division, etc. according to its parameters (such as width, height, image boundary, coding tree level, etc.). If the image block allows one division method, the decoding side can decode the image block normally using this division method; otherwise, the decoding side will decode the image block by default without using this division method for decoding.
  • the preset threshold determines that the current image block is not allowed to use HBT division and VEQT division; if the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VBT division and HEQT Division method; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use HEQT division; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, the current image is determined Blocks are not allowed to use VEQT division.
  • the seventh preset threshold and the eighth preset threshold may be set in a video encoder or a video decoder, or may be parsed from a high-level syntax element (for example, SPS, PPS, or slice header) in the code stream.
  • the seventh preset threshold may be taken as the minimum preset unit side length minCUSize, that is, the minimum CU side length, for example, 4 or 8.
  • the eighth preset threshold can be obtained by calculating twice the seventh preset threshold, that is, the eighth preset threshold is minCUSize ⁇ 2, for example, 8 or 16.
  • the values of the seventh preset threshold and the eighth preset threshold may also be other values, which are not limited to the above examples.
  • a forced division method may also be determined for the current image block, and performed according to the determined forced division method Divide, so as to further reduce the computational complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding, thereby improving compression performance.
  • the method includes:
  • Step 1 Determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image
  • the current image block is parsed from the current image or from the code stream Block information, and then, based on these block information, determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image.
  • the following gives an example of judging that the current image block exceeds the right border, the lower border, and the lower right border of the current image. If one of the following conditions 1 to 3 is true, it means that the current image block exceeds the current image. Boundary, otherwise it means that the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image.
  • Condition 1 If the value of (x, y) in the current image block satisfies x+cW>picW, and y+cH ⁇ picH, the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image;
  • Condition 3 If the value of (x, y) in the current image block satisfies x+cW>picW and y+cH>picH, the current image block exceeds the lower right boundary of the current image.
  • the width of the current image is picW
  • the height is picH
  • the width of the current image block is cW
  • the height is cH
  • (x, y) represents the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current node relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image .
  • Step 2 When the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, determine the forced division method of the current image block.
  • the forced division method of the current image block can be determined according to one of the following methods.
  • the first preset threshold K may be any integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, 64.
  • the threshold K may be any integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, 64.
  • the current image block When the current image block exceeds the lower right border of the current image: the current image block is forced to use QT division.
  • the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image: If the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold M and the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold L, the current image block is forced to use HBT division; otherwise, the current image block is forced to use VBT division .
  • the threshold M and the threshold L may be integers greater than or equal to 32, for example, the threshold M is 64 and the threshold L is 128.
  • the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image: If the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold M and the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold L, the current image block is forced to use VBT division; otherwise, the current image block is forced to use HBT division .
  • the threshold M and the threshold L may be integers greater than or equal to 32, for example, the threshold M is 64 and the threshold L is 128.
  • the current image block When the current image block exceeds the lower right border of the current image: the current image block is forced to use QT division.
  • step 3 can also be performed, and step 3 and step 2 are not in order.
  • Step 3 When the current image block does not exceed the image boundary, determine the division method of the current image block
  • Step 3.1 Determine the forced division method of the current image block
  • the forced division of the current image block can be derived by one of the following methods, for example:
  • the current image block is forced to use VBT division
  • the current image block is forced to use HBT division
  • the threshold maxRatio may be an integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, 4 or 8.
  • the current image block is forced to use QT division, where S is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 128 Or 256.
  • step 3.2 or step 3.3 may be executed to determine the division method of the current image block.
  • Step 3.2 Determine the allowed division method of the current image block
  • the division method allowed for the current image block is the legal division method for decoding. For an image block, you can also determine whether the image block allows VBT division, HBT division, VEQT division, HEQT division, and QT division based on its parameters (such as width, height, image boundary, coding tree level, etc.). If a division method is allowed, the decoder can use this division method to decode normally when decoding the image block; otherwise, the decoder will not use this division method for decoding by default when decoding the image block.
  • minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example, equal to 4 or 8.
  • minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example, equal to 4 or 8.
  • minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example, equal to 4 or 8.
  • minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example, equal to 4 or 8.
  • Step 3.3 Determine the division method indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block
  • the syntax element corresponding to the current image block can also be parsed in the code stream, and the division method corresponding to the current image block during encoding can be obtained from the syntax element.
  • Step 4 Divide the current image block according to the division method determined for the current image block to obtain all leaf nodes, ie CUs, with the current image block as the follow-up node;
  • the decoding end divides the current image block according to the division mode determined for the current image block, obtains corresponding child nodes, and determines the division mode for each child node in turn, and then determines the division mode. If the current image block is no longer divided, the current image block is CU.
  • Step 5 Analyze and obtain the syntax elements of each CU from the code stream and perform a decoding operation on the CU to obtain the reconstruction block corresponding to the current image block.
  • the transform coefficients are subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing to obtain a residual block, which is superimposed on the prediction block of the corresponding sub-region to generate a reconstructed block, that is, to reconstruct the current image block.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides an image block dividing device, which can be applied to a video encoder and a video decoder.
  • the image block division device 100 includes: an acquisition unit 101, a judgment unit 102, a determination unit 103, and a division unit 104; Unit 101, used to obtain the block information of the current image block in the current image; judgment unit 102, used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image based on the block information; determination unit 103, used if the current image block exceeds the current image , The boundary of the current image block is determined to be a forced division mode; the division unit 104 is used to divide the current image block according to the forced division mode.
  • the determining unit is specifically used to compare the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold to determine the corresponding forced division method for the current image block, and the size information is obtained from the block information;
  • the determination unit includes: a first determination subunit and a second determination subunit; the first determination subunit is used when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the comparison result indicates that the current The width of the image block is equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is greater than or the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the horizontal binary tree HBT division; if the comparison result indicates that the width of the current image block is not Is equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to or the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the vertical binary tree VBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; the second determination The subunit is used to determine the current when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the comparison result indicates that the width of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is equal to
  • the determination unit includes: a third determination subunit and a fourth determination subunit; the third determination subunit is used when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the comparison result indicates that the current The width of the image block is greater than the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; also used if the comparison result indicates that the width of the current image block is less than Or equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or, the fourth determiner Unit for determining the current image block if the comparison result indicates that the height of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the width of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image It
  • the second preset threshold is an integer greater than or equal to 32.
  • the second preset threshold is 64
  • the third preset threshold is 128.
  • the determining unit is specifically configured to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the quadtree QT division method when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
  • a judgment unit is used to obtain the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block according to the block information; determine whether the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy the preset condition, If the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the first preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the second preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the current image If the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point meet the third preset condition, it means that the pixel point exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
  • the pixel coordinates (x, y) are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image; accordingly, the first preset condition is: pixels The coordinates (x, y) of the point satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH ⁇ picH; the second preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy x+cW ⁇ picW, and y+cH> picH; the third preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixels satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH; where cW is the width of the current image block, and cH is the height of the current image block, picW is the width of the current image, and picH is the height of the current image.
  • the determining unit is also used to determine a mandatory division method for the current image block based on at least the size information of the current image block if the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image.
  • the size information is obtained from the block information ;
  • the division unit is also used to divide the current image block according to the determined forced division method.
  • the determination unit further includes: a calculation subunit, a fifth determination subunit, and a sixth determination subunit; the calculation subunit is used for calculating the ratio of the width to the height of the current image block according to the size information
  • the fifth determination subunit is used to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method if the ratio is greater than the fourth preset threshold, and the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer; the sixth determination subunit is used for the ratio If it is smaller than the fifth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, and the fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
  • the determination unit further includes: a determination subunit and a seventh determination subunit; a determination subunit, used to determine whether the current image block is an I-strip or an I frame; and also used to determine the current image block Whether the width and height of are equal to the sixth preset threshold, and the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer; the seventh determination subunit is used if the current image block is an I-strip or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block If they are all equal to the sixth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
  • the division unit is also used to determine the final division method from the division methods allowed for the current image block when the mandatory division method is not determined for the current image block, and to determine the current division method according to the final division method.
  • the image block is divided; or, when a mandatory division method is not determined for the current image block, the current image block is divided according to the division method indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block.
  • the dividing unit is also used to determine the divisions that are not allowed to be used by the current image block according to the size information of the current image block before dividing the current image block according to the allowed division method of the current image block Method; wherein, if the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use HBT division and VEQT division, the seventh preset threshold is the side length of the smallest coding unit CU; If the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the VBT division method and the HEQT division method; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, the current image block is determined HEQT division is not allowed.
  • the eighth preset threshold is twice the seventh preset threshold; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VEQT division
  • the above acquisition unit 101, judgment unit 102, determination unit 103, and division unit 104 can be applied to the image block division process at the encoding end or the decoding end.
  • the video coding method includes: performing the image block division method as described in one or more embodiments above to divide the current coding block; predicting the CU divided by the current coding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; according to the current coding Block and prediction block to obtain the corresponding residual block; entropy coding the residual block to generate the corresponding code stream.
  • the encoding end performs S801 to S806 for this current encoding block and each sub-block divided by it, until all sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time, the encoding end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, these leaves
  • the image area corresponding to the node is the CU.
  • the encoding end performs prediction processing on each CU to obtain the corresponding prediction block, and then obtains the corresponding residual block according to the current image block and the prediction block, and then entropy encodes the residual block to generate the corresponding code stream. To encode the current image block.
  • the video decoding method includes: performing the image block division method as described in one or more embodiments above to divide the current decoding block; predicting the CU divided by the current decoding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; according to The residual block and the prediction block parsed in the code stream are used to reconstruct the current decoding block.
  • the decoding end performs S801 to S806 for the current decoding block and each sub-block divided by it until all sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time the decoding end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, these leaves
  • the image area corresponding to the node is the CU.
  • the decoding end parses and obtains the syntax elements corresponding to each CU from the code stream, obtains the prediction information and residual information of each CU and each sub-region, and can perform inter-frame on each sub-region according to the corresponding prediction information of each sub-region
  • the prediction process or the intra prediction process obtains the inter prediction block or the intra prediction block of each sub-region.
  • the transform coefficients are subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing to obtain a residual block, which is superimposed on the prediction block of the corresponding sub-region to generate a reconstructed block, that is, to reconstruct the current image block.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a video encoder for encoding an image block, including: performing an image block division device as described in one or more of the above embodiments, wherein , The image block dividing device is used to obtain the block information of the current coding block from the current image.
  • the current image block is the image block to be coded in the current image; according to the block information, it is determined whether the current coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coding image; if the current If the coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coded image, a forced division method is determined for the current coding block, and the current coding block is divided according to the forced division method; the first prediction processing unit is used to predict the CU divided by the current coding block, Obtain the corresponding prediction block; the residual calculation unit, used to obtain the corresponding residual block according to the current coding block and the prediction block; the entropy coding unit, used to entropy encode the residual block to generate the corresponding code stream.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a video decoder for decoding an image block from a code stream, including: performing an image as described in one or more embodiments above Block dividing device, wherein the image block dividing device is used to obtain the block information of the current decoded block from the code stream, the current decoded block is the image block to be decoded in the current image; according to the block information, it is judged whether the current decoded block exceeds the current decoded image The boundary of the current decoding block; if the current decoding block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image, determine the mandatory division mode for the current decoding block, and divide the current decoding block according to the mandatory division mode; the second prediction processing unit is used to divide the current decoding block The CU performs prediction to obtain the corresponding prediction block; the reconstruction unit is used to reconstruct the current decoding block according to the residual block and the prediction block parsed from the code stream.
  • inventions of the present application provide an apparatus for encoding video data.
  • the apparatus includes: a memory for storing video data, and the video data includes one or more image blocks; video encoding Is used to obtain the block information of the current encoding block from the current image.
  • the current image block is the image block to be encoded in the current image; according to the block information, it is determined whether the current encoding block exceeds the boundary of the current encoding image; if the current encoding block exceeds At the boundary of the current coded image, a mandatory division method is determined for the current coding block, and the current coding block is divided according to the mandatory division method; the sub-blocks divided by the current coding block are coded to obtain the code stream corresponding to the current coding block.
  • inventions of the present application provide an apparatus for decoding video data.
  • the apparatus includes: a memory for storing video data in the form of a code stream; and a video decoder for extracting data from the code stream Obtain the block information of the current decoded block.
  • the current decoded block is the image block to be decoded in the current image; according to the block information, determine whether the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image; if the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image, it is The current decoding block determines the mandatory division method, and divides the current decoding block according to the mandatory division method; predicts the CU divided by the current decoding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; according to the residual block and prediction parsed from the code stream Block to reconstruct the current decoded block.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an encoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, and the processor calls program codes stored in the memory to execute, for example, Part or all of the steps of the image block division method described in the above one or more embodiments.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a decoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, and the processor calls program codes stored in the memory to execute Part or all of the steps of the image block division method described in the above one or more embodiments.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores a program code, where the program code includes one or more Instructions for some or all steps of the image block division method described in the embodiments.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute images as described in one or more of the above embodiments Part or all steps of the block division method.
  • Computer-readable media may include computer-readable storage media, which corresponds to tangible media, such as data storage media, or communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another (eg, according to a communication protocol).
  • computer-readable media may generally correspond to (1) non-transitory tangible computer-readable storage media, or (2) communication media, such as signals or carrier waves.
  • Data storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, code and/or data structures for implementation of the techniques described in this application.
  • the computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.
  • Such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM, or other optical disk storage devices, magnetic disk storage devices, or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or may be used to store instructions or data structures
  • the desired program code in the form of and any other medium that can be accessed by the computer. And, any connection is properly called a computer-readable medium.
  • coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology such as infrared, radio, and microwave is used to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source
  • coaxial cable Wire, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of media.
  • the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media.
  • magnetic disks and optical discs include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), and Blu-ray discs, where magnetic discs typically reproduce data magnetically, while optical discs reproduce optically using lasers data. Combinations of the above should also be included in the scope of computer-readable media.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable logic arrays
  • processors may refer to any of the foregoing structure or any other structure suitable for implementation of the techniques described herein.
  • the functions described in the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps described herein may be provided within dedicated hardware and/or software modules configured for encoding and decoding, or in combination Into the combined codec.
  • the techniques can be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.
  • the technology of the present application may be implemented in a variety of devices or equipment, including wireless handsets, integrated circuits (ICs), or a set of ICs (eg, chipsets).
  • ICs integrated circuits
  • a set of ICs eg, chipsets
  • Various components, modules or units are described in this application to emphasize the functional aspects of the device for performing the disclosed technology, but do not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units.
  • various units may be combined in a codec hardware unit in combination with suitable software and/or firmware, or by interoperating hardware units (including one or more processors as described above) provide.

Abstract

Provided are an image block division method and device. The method comprises: acquiring block information of a current image block in a current image; determining, according to the block information, whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image; if the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, determining a mandatory division method for the current image block; and dividing the current image block according to the mandatory division method. In the present application, by means of determining a mandatory division method for the current image block that exceeds the boundary of the current image, the computational complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding is reduced, thereby improving the compression performance.

Description

一种图像块划分方法及装置Method and device for dividing image blocks
本申请要求于2018年12月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为201811575681.9,以及于2019年1月8日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910017097.X的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires the priority of the Chinese patent application filed on December 22, 2018, with the application number 201811575681.9, and the Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese patent office, with the application number 201910017097.X, on January 8, 2019. Incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及视频图像技术,尤其涉及一种图像块划分方法及装置。The present application relates to video image technology, and in particular, to an image block division method and device.
背景技术Background technique
数字视频能力可并入到多种多样的装置中,包含数字电视、数字直播系统、无线广播系统、个人数字助理(PDA)、膝上型或桌上型计算机、平板计算机、电子图书阅读器、数码相机、数字记录装置、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏装置、视频游戏控制台、蜂窝式或卫星无线电电话(所谓的“智能电话”)、视频电话会议装置、视频流式传输装置及其类似者。数字视频装置实施视频压缩技术,例如,在由MPEG-2、MPEG-4、ITU-T H.263、ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4第10部分高级视频编码(AVC)定义的标准、视频编码标准H.265/高效视频编码(HEVC)标准以及此类标准的扩展中所描述的视频压缩技术。视频装置可通过实施此类视频压缩技术来更有效率地发射、接收、编码、解码和/或存储数字视频信息。Digital video capabilities can be incorporated into a variety of devices, including digital TVs, digital live broadcast systems, wireless broadcast systems, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop or desktop computers, tablet computers, e-book readers, Digital cameras, digital recording devices, digital media players, video game devices, video game consoles, cellular or satellite radio phones (so-called "smart phones"), video teleconferencing devices, video streaming devices, and the like . Digital video devices implement video compression technology, for example, in the standards defined by MPEG-2, MPEG-4, ITU-T H.263, ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4 Part 10 Advanced Video Coding (AVC), The video compression technology described in the video coding standard H.265/High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard and extensions to such standards. Video devices can more efficiently transmit, receive, encode, decode, and/or store digital video information by implementing such video compression techniques.
视频压缩技术执行空间(图像内)预测和/或时间(图像间)预测以减少或去除视频序列中固有的冗余。对于基于块的视频编码,视频条带(即,视频帧或视频帧的一部分)可分割成若干图像块,所述图像块也可被称作树块、编码单元(CU,Coding Unit)和/或编码块。使用关于同一图像中的相邻块中的参考样本的空间预测来编码图像的待帧内编码(I)条带中的图像块。图像的待帧间编码(P或B)条带中的图像块可使用相对于同一图像中的相邻块中的参考样本的空间预测或相对于其它参考图像中的参考样本的时间预测。图像可被称作帧,且参考图像可被称作参考帧。Video compression techniques perform spatial (intra-image) prediction and/or temporal (inter-image) prediction to reduce or remove redundancy inherent in video sequences. For block-based video coding, a video slice (ie, a video frame or a portion of a video frame) can be divided into several image blocks, which can also be called tree blocks, coding units (CU, Coding Units), and/or Or coding block. The image block in the to-be-intra-coded (I) slice of the image is encoded using spatial prediction regarding reference samples in adjacent blocks in the same image. An image block in an inter-coded (P or B) slice of an image may use spatial prediction relative to reference samples in neighboring blocks in the same image or temporal prediction relative to reference samples in other reference images. The image may be referred to as a frame, and the reference image may be referred to as a reference frame.
但是,在视频序列进行编码的过程中划分图像块时,若要确定一个图像块的划分方式,需要先计算多种划分方式对应的率失真代价,比较各个率失真代价后才能确定该图像块的最优划分方式;而在视频序列进行解码的过程中划分图像块时,则需要不断从码流中解析各个图像块的划分方式,按解析出的划分方式划分的图像块才能够正确解码。由此可见,现有技术中图像块划分方法导致视频序列编解码的计算复杂度过高。However, when dividing an image block during the encoding of a video sequence, to determine the division method of an image block, the rate-distortion costs corresponding to multiple division methods need to be calculated first, and the rate-distortion cost of each image block can be determined after comparing the rate-distortion costs. Optimal division method; when dividing image blocks in the process of decoding a video sequence, it is necessary to continuously analyze the division method of each image block from the code stream, and the image blocks divided according to the parsed division method can be decoded correctly. It can be seen that the image block division method in the prior art causes the calculation complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding to be too high.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种图像块划分方法及装置,在一定程度上降低视频序列编解码的计算复杂度。The present application provides an image block division method and device, which reduces the computational complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding to a certain extent.
第一方面,本申请提供一种图像块划分方法,该方法可以应用于视频序列的编码 和解码中。其中,该方法包括:首先从当前图像或者码流中获取当前图像块的块信息,这里所说的当前图像块为当前图像的一个图像块;然后,根据当前图像块的块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界,如果当前图像块超出当前图像的边界,那么,为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前图像块进行划分;In the first aspect, the present application provides an image block division method, which can be applied to encoding and decoding of video sequences. Among them, the method includes: first obtaining the block information of the current image block from the current image or code stream, where the current image block is an image block of the current image; then, according to the block information of the current image block, the current image is determined Whether the block exceeds the boundary of the current image, if the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, then determine the mandatory division method for the current image block, and divide the current image block according to the mandatory division method;
当前图像块为当前图像划分出的一个图像块,对应于当前图像的编码树上的一个节点,当前图像块可以为当前图像的一个CTU,也可以为以CTU为根节点划分得到的子块,还可以为以一个层级的子块为根节点划分得到的下一层级的子块。The current image block is an image block divided by the current image, corresponding to a node on the coding tree of the current image. The current image block may be a CTU of the current image or a sub-block obtained by dividing the CTU as the root node. It can also be a sub-block of the next level obtained by dividing a sub-block of one level as the root node.
当前图像块的块信息可以包括当前图像块的尺寸信息,如当前图像块的宽、高,还可以包括当前图像块中像素点的坐标,这里,像素点的坐标是相对于当前图像左上顶点的像素位置的坐标,当然,块信息还可以为当前图像块对应的其他图像相关信息,这些块信息能够从当前图像或者码流中得到;The block information of the current image block may include the size information of the current image block, such as the width and height of the current image block, and may also include the coordinates of the pixels in the current image block. Here, the coordinates of the pixels are relative to the upper left vertex of the current image. The coordinates of the pixel position. Of course, the block information can also be other image-related information corresponding to the current image block. These block information can be obtained from the current image or code stream;
上述当前图像的边界可以包括却不限于:当前图像的右边界和/或下边界。The boundary of the current image may include but is not limited to: the right boundary and/or the lower boundary of the current image.
这里,需要说明的是,上述当前图像块超出当前图像的边界并不是指当前图像块中超出图像边界的范围内还有像素值,而是指当前图像块中沿某一个方向或者两个方向的最大坐标值超出了图像边界沿着相同方向的坐标值。Here, it should be noted that the above-mentioned current image block beyond the current image boundary does not mean that there are still pixel values in the current image block beyond the image boundary, but it refers to the current image block in a certain direction or two directions The maximum coordinate value exceeds the coordinate value of the image boundary along the same direction.
在本申请中,强制划分方式是指当前图像块的划分方式无需通过解析码流得到,且当前图像块直接使用该强制划分方式进行划分。上述为当前图像块确定的强制划分方式可以且不限为水平二叉树(HBT,Horizontal Binary Tree)、竖直二叉树(VBT,Vertical Binary Tree)、四叉树(QT,Quad Tree)、水平扩展四叉树(HEQT,Horizontal Extended Quad Tree)以及竖直扩展四叉树(VEQT,Vertical Extended Quad Tree)这几种划分方式中的一种或者多种的级联,其中,HBT和VBT属于二叉树(BT,Binary Tree)划分方式中的具体应用,HEQT和VEQT属于扩展四叉树(EQT,Extended Quad Tree)的划分方式中的具体应用。例如,在AVS3标准中,使用了QT级联BT/EQT的划分方式,即第一级编码树上的节点只能使用QT划分成子节点,第一级编码树的子节点为第二级编码树的根节点;第二级编码树上的根节点可使用BT或EQT划分方式中的一种划分为子节点。需要注意的是,当子节点使用BT或EQT划分方式时,其子节点只能使用BT或EQT划分方式,而不能使用QT的划分方式。In the present application, the forced division method means that the division method of the current image block does not need to be obtained by parsing the code stream, and the current image block is directly divided using the forced division method. The above-mentioned mandatory division method for the current image block can be and is not limited to horizontal binary tree (HBT, Horizontal Binary Tree), vertical binary tree (VBT, Vertical Binary Tree), quadtree (QT, Quad), horizontal expansion quadtree Tree (HEQT, Horizontal Extended Tree) and Vertically Extended Quad Tree (VEQT, Vertical Extended Tree) are one or more cascades of these divisions. Among them, HBT and VBT belong to binary tree (BT, Binary Tree) specific application in the division method, HEQT and VEQT belong to the specific application in the division method of Extended Quad Tree (EQT, Extended Quad Tree). For example, in the AVS3 standard, QT concatenated BT/EQT is used, that is, the nodes on the first level coding tree can only be divided into child nodes using QT, and the child nodes of the first level coding tree are the second level coding tree The root node of the second level coding tree can be divided into child nodes using one of the BT or EQT division methods. It should be noted that when a child node uses BT or EQT division, its child nodes can only use BT or EQT division, but not QT division.
本申请中,在当前图像中,按照之字形(Zigzag)进行扫描的过程中,当扫描到当前图像中的一个图像块,即当前图像块时,从当前图像中或者从码流中解析得到当前图像块的块信息,然后,根据这些块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界,并为超出当前图像的边界的当前图像块确定强制划分方式,并按此方式进行强制划分,避免编码端为确定当前图像块的最优的划分方式而多次计算率失真代价,也无需解码端不断从码流中解析当前图像块的划分方式,从而降低视频序列编解码的计算复杂度,提升压缩性能。In this application, in the current image, when scanning according to the zigzag (Zigzag), when an image block in the current image is scanned, that is, the current image block, the current image is parsed from the current image or from the code stream The block information of the image block, then, based on these block information, determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, and determine the forced division method for the current image block that exceeds the boundary of the current image, and perform forced division in this way to avoid encoding In order to determine the optimal division method of the current image block, the end calculates the rate-distortion cost multiple times, and the decoding end does not need to continuously parse the current image block division method from the code stream, thereby reducing the calculation complexity of the video sequence codec and improving compression performance.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,包括:将当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,尺寸信息是由块信息获得的。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, determining the forced division method for the current image block includes: comparing the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold, and determining the corresponding forced division method and size for the current image block The information is obtained from the block information.
本申请中,上述预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置,也可以从码流中解析得到。预设阈值的取值可以根据实际需求的不同而不同,本申请不做具体限定。In this application, the above-mentioned preset threshold can be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or can also be parsed from the code stream. The value of the preset threshold may be different according to actual needs, and this application does not specifically limit it.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时,将当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,包括:若当前图像块的宽等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高大于第一预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;若当前图像块的宽不等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高小于或者等于或者第一预设阈值,确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,第一预设阈值为正整数;或者,若当前图像块的宽等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高等于第三预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;若当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;第二预设阈值小于第三预设阈值,第二预设阈值和第三预设阈值为大于或者等于32的整数。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, the size information of the current image block is compared with a preset threshold to determine the corresponding forced division method for the current image block, Including: if the width of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold and the height of the current image block is greater than the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the width of the current image block is not equal to the first A preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to or the first preset threshold, determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or, if the width of the current image block Is equal to the second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the width of the current image block is not equal to the second preset threshold, and the current image If the height of the block is not equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; the second preset threshold is less than the third preset threshold, and the second preset threshold and the third preset threshold are greater than or An integer equal to 32.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时,根据比较结果,为当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,包括:若当前图像块的宽大于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高等于第一预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;若当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高不等于第一预设阈值,确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,第一预设阈值为正整数;或者,若当前图像块的高等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的宽等于第三预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;否则,确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;第二预设阈值小于第三预设阈值Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, the corresponding forced division method is determined for the current image block according to the comparison result, including: If the width of the current image block is greater than the A preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the current image block Is not equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or, if the height of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold, and the current image block Is equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; otherwise, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; the second preset threshold is less than the third preset threshold
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,第二预设阈值为大于或者等于32的整数。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the second preset threshold is an integer greater than or equal to 32.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,第二预设阈值为64,第三预设阈值为128。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the second preset threshold is 64, and the third preset threshold is 128.
其中,第一预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置(如设置为64),也可以从码流中解析得到。The first preset threshold can be set in the video encoder or video decoder (for example, set to 64), or can be obtained by parsing from the code stream.
第二预设阈值和第三预设值均可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置,也可以从码流中解析得到。第二预设阈值可以与第三预设阈值不等,如第二预设阈值取64,第三预设阈值取128,也可以第二预设阈值取64,第三预设阈值取32,当然,还可以有第二预设阈值和第三预设阈值还可以有其他的取值情况,只要能够满足第二预设阈值小于第三预设阈值这一条件即可,本申请不作具体限定。Both the second preset threshold and the third preset value can be set in the video encoder or video decoder, and can also be parsed from the code stream. The second preset threshold may be different from the third preset threshold, for example, the second preset threshold is 64 and the third preset threshold is 128, or the second preset threshold is 64 and the third preset threshold is 32, Of course, there may be a second preset threshold and a third preset threshold, and there may be other values, as long as the condition that the second preset threshold is less than the third preset threshold can be satisfied, this application does not specifically limit .
上述第一预设阈值、第二预设阈值以及第三预设阈值的取值,本领域技术人员可以根据实际图像划分的需求设置,并不仅限于上述举例。The values of the first preset threshold, the second preset threshold, and the third preset threshold can be set by those skilled in the art according to the needs of actual image division, and are not limited to the above examples.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界且超出当前图像的下边界时,为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,包括:确定当前图像块强制按照四叉树QT的划分方式划分。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, determining the forced division method for the current image block includes: The division method of QT of the cross tree.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,根据块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界,包括:根据块信息,获得当前图像块中的一个像素点的坐标 (x,y);判断像素点的坐标(x,y)是否满足预设条件,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第一预设条件,则表明像素超出当前图像的右边界,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第二预设条件,则表明像素超出当前图像的下边界,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第三预设条件,则表明像素点超出当前图像的右边界且超出当前图像的下边界。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, determining whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image based on the block information includes: according to the block information, obtaining the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block ; Determine whether the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the preset conditions, if the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the first preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the pixel coordinates ( x, y) meet the second preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the pixel coordinate (x, y) meets the third preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds The lower border of the current image.
上述像素点是用来表示当前图像块的,可以选取当前图像块中特定的像素点来表示当前图像块,如选取当前图像块的各个顶点的像素点,如左上顶点的像素点、右上顶点的像素点、左下顶点的像素点或者右下顶点的像素点,当然,还可以选取当前图像块的中心位置的像素点。通过这些像素点的坐标与当前图像的边界的坐标之间的比较,就能够判断出当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界。当然,为了进一步提高准确度,还可以选取当前图像块中的任意一个像素点,并以该以此来判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界。在本申请中,还可以采用其他条件来判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界,对此不作具体限定。The above pixels are used to represent the current image block. You can select specific pixels in the current image block to represent the current image block. For example, select the pixels of each vertex of the current image block, such as the pixels of the upper left vertex and the pixels of the upper right vertex. The pixel point, the pixel point of the lower left vertex or the pixel point of the lower right vertex, of course, you can also select the pixel point of the center position of the current image block. By comparing the coordinates of these pixel points with the coordinates of the boundary of the current image, it can be determined whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image. Of course, in order to further improve the accuracy, any pixel in the current image block can also be selected and used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image. In this application, other conditions may also be used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, which is not specifically limited.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,像素点的坐标(x,y)为当前图像块中的左上顶点的像素点相对于当前图像左上顶点像素位置的坐标;相应地,第一预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH≤picH;第二预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW≤picW,且y+cH>picH;第三预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH>picH;其中,cW为当前图像块的宽,cH为当前图像块的高,picW为当前图像的宽,picH为当前图像的高。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, the coordinates (x, y) of the pixels are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image; accordingly, the first pre Let the condition be: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH≤picH; the second preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW≤picW, And y+cH>picH; the third preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH; where cW is the width of the current image block and cH is the current The height of the image block, picW is the width of the current image, and picH is the height of the current image.
上述第一预设条件、第二预设条件以及第三预设条件根据选取的像素点的坐标(x,y)的不同而不同,本申请不作具体限定。The first preset condition, the second preset condition, and the third preset condition are different according to the coordinates (x, y) of the selected pixel point, and are not specifically limited in this application.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,在根据块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界之后,方法还包括:若当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界,则至少根据当前图像块的尺寸信息为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,尺寸信息是由块信息获得的;按照确定出的强制划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, after determining whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image based on the block information, the method further includes: if the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image, at least according to the current image The size information of the block determines the forced division method for the current image block, and the size information is obtained from the block information; the current image block is divided according to the determined forced division method.
在本申请中,根据当前图像块的块信息,判断当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界,此时,还可以为该当前图像块确定强制划分方式,并按照确定出的强制划分方式进行划分,从而进一步降低视频序列编解码的计算复杂度,从而提升了压缩性能。In this application, according to the block information of the current image block, it is determined that the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image. At this time, a forced division method may also be determined for the current image block, and division is performed according to the determined forced division method. Thereby further reducing the computational complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding, thereby improving the compression performance.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,至少根据当前图像块的尺寸信息,为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,包括:根据尺寸信息,计算当前图像块的宽与高的比值;若比值大于第四预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,第四预设阈值为正整数;若比值小于第五预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,第五预设阈值为第四预设阈值的倒数。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, at least according to the size information of the current image block, determining a mandatory division method for the current image block includes: calculating the ratio of the width and height of the current image block based on the size information; If it is greater than the fourth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, and the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer; if the ratio is less than the fifth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method , The fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
上述第四预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置,也可以从码流中解析得到。第四预设阈值可以取最大比值maxRatio,例如4或8。第五预设阈值可以通过第四预设阈值取倒数来计算获得,那么,第五预设阈值可以取1/maxRatio,取值范围为(0,1),例如1/4或者1/8。The above fourth preset threshold may be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or may be parsed from the code stream. The fourth preset threshold may take a maximum ratio maxRatio, for example, 4 or 8. The fifth preset threshold can be calculated by taking the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold, then, the fifth preset threshold can be 1/maxRatio, with a value range of (0, 1), such as 1/4 or 1/8.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,至少根据当前图像块的尺寸信息,为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,包括:判断当前图像块是否为I条带或者I帧;判断当前图像块的宽和高是否均等于第六预设阈值,第六预设阈值为正整数;若当前图像 的图像块为I条带或者I帧,且当前图像块的宽和高均等于第六预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照QT的划分方式划分。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, at least according to the size information of the current image block, determining a mandatory division method for the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block is an I-band or an I frame; determining the current image block Whether the width and height of are equal to the sixth preset threshold, and the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer; if the image block of the current image is I band or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset The threshold value determines that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
上述第六预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置(如设置为128或者256),也可以从码流中解析得到。The above sixth preset threshold can be set in the video encoder or video decoder (for example, set to 128 or 256), or can also be parsed from the code stream.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,在至少根据当前图像块的尺寸信息,为当前图像块确定强制划分方式之后,方法还包括:当为所述当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,从所述当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式,并按照所述最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分;或者,当为所述当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,按照所述当前图像块对应的语法元素所指示的划分方式,对所述当前图像块进行划分。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, after at least determining the mandatory division method for the current image block according to the size information of the current image block, the method further includes: when no mandatory division method is determined for the current image block , Determine the final division mode from the division modes allowed for the current image block, and divide the current image block according to the final division mode; or, when no mandatory division mode is determined for the current image block , Dividing the current image block according to the division manner indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block.
对于一些未超出的当前图像的边界的图像块来说,存在尺寸和图像类型不满足上述预设条件的情况,此时,认为这些图像块不具有强制划分方式,那么,这些图像块就可以按照当前图像块允许使用的划分方式或者按照当前图像块对应的语法元素所指示的划分方式进行划分。For some image blocks that do not exceed the boundary of the current image, there are cases where the size and image type do not meet the above preset conditions. At this time, it is considered that these image blocks do not have a mandatory division method, then these image blocks can be The current image block is allowed to use the division method or the division method indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block.
基于第一方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,在按照当前图像块允许使用的划分方式,对当前图像块进行划分之前,方法还包括:根据当前图像块的尺寸信息,确定当前图像块不允许使用的划分方式;其中,若当前图像块的高等于第七预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用HBT的划分方式和VEQT的划分方式,第七预设阈值为最小编码单元的边长;若当前图像块的宽等于第七预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用VBT的划分方式和HEQT的划分方式;若当前图像块的高小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用HEQT的划分方式,第八预设阈值为第七预设阈值的2倍;若当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用VEQT的划分方式。Based on the first aspect, in some possible implementations, before dividing the current image block according to the allowed division method of the current image block, the method further includes: according to the size information of the current image block, determining that the current image block is not allowed The division method used; where, if the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the HBT division method and the VEQT division method, and the seventh preset threshold value is the side length of the smallest coding unit ; If the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the VBT division method and the HEQT division method; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, then determine the current The image block is not allowed to use the HEQT division method. The eighth preset threshold is twice the seventh preset threshold; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VEQT Division method.
上述第七预设阈值和第八预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置,也可以从码流中解析得到。其中,第七预设阈值可以取minCUSize,也就是最小CU边长,例如取4或8。第八预设阈值可以通过计算第七预设阈值的2倍来获得,即取minCUSize×2,例如取8或16。The seventh preset threshold and the eighth preset threshold may be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or may be obtained by parsing from the code stream. The seventh preset threshold may be minCUSize, which is the minimum CU side length, for example, 4 or 8. The eighth preset threshold can be obtained by calculating twice the seventh preset threshold, that is, taking minCUSize×2, for example, taking 8 or 16.
第二方面,本申请提供一种图像块划分装置,包括用于实施第一方面的任意一种方法的若干个功能单元。举例来说,图像块划分装置可以包括:获取单元,用于获取当前图像中当前图像块的块信息;判断单元,用于根据块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界;确定单元,用于若当前图像块超出当前图像的边界,则为当前图像块确定强制划分方式;划分单元,用于按照强制划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。In a second aspect, the present application provides an image block division device, including several functional units for implementing any one of the methods of the first aspect. For example, the image block division device may include: an acquisition unit for acquiring block information of the current image block in the current image; a determination unit for determining whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image based on the block information; a determination unit, It is used to determine the forced division mode for the current image block if the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image; the division unit is used to divide the current image block according to the forced division mode.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,确定单元,具体用于将当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,尺寸信息是由块信息获得的。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the determining unit is specifically configured to compare the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold to determine the corresponding forced division method for the current image block. The size information is determined by the block information acquired.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,确定单元,包括:第一确定子单元和第二确定子单元;第一确定子单元,用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时,若当前图像块的宽等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高大于或者第一预设阈值,则确 定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;若当前图像块的宽不等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高小于或者等于或者第一预设阈值,确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,第一预设阈值为正整数;第二确定子单元,用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时,若当前图像块的宽等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高等于第三预设阈值时,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;若当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;第二预设阈值小于第三预设阈值。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the determining unit includes: a first determining subunit and a second determining subunit; the first determining subunit is used when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, If the width of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold and the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the width of the current image block is not equal to the first A preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to or the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; the second determination subunit is used for when When the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method ; If the width of the current image block is not equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is not equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; the second preset threshold is less than the third Preset threshold.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,确定单元,包括:第三确定子单元和第四确定子单元;第三确定子单元,用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时,若当前图像块的宽大于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高等于第一预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;还用于若当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高不等于第一预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,第一预设阈值为正整数;或者,第四确定子单元,用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时,若当前图像块的宽等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高等于第三预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;第二预设阈值小于第三预设阈值。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the determining unit includes: a third determining subunit and a fourth determining subunit; the third determining subunit is used when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, If the width of the current image block is greater than the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; also used if the width of the current image block is less than or Is equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or, the fourth determination subunit , Used to determine that the current image block is forced to comply with the VBT when the width of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image Divided by division method; the width of the current image block is not equal to the second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; the second preset threshold is less than the Three preset thresholds.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,第二预设阈值为大于或者等于32的整数。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the second preset threshold is an integer greater than or equal to 32.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,第二预设阈值为64,第三预设阈值为128。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the second preset threshold is 64, and the third preset threshold is 128.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,确定单元,具体用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界且超出当前图像的下边界时,确定当前图像块强制按照QT的划分方式划分。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the determining unit is specifically configured to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,判断单元,用于根据块信息,获得当前图像块中的一个像素点的坐标(x,y);判断像素点的坐标(x,y)是否满足预设条件,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第一预设条件,则表明像素超出当前图像的右边界,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第二预设条件,则表明像素超出当前图像的下边界,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第三预设条件,则表明像素点超出当前图像的右边界且超出当前图像的下边界。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the judgment unit is configured to obtain the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block according to the block information; determine whether the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel Satisfying the preset condition, if the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the first preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the second preset condition, then It indicates that the pixel exceeds the lower boundary of the current image. If the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the third preset condition, it indicates that the pixel point exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,像素点的坐标(x,y)为当前图像块中的左上顶点的像素点相对于当前图像左上顶点像素位置的坐标;相应地,第一预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH≤picH;第二预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW≤picW,且y+cH>picH;第三预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH>picH;其中,cW为当前图像块的宽,cH为当前图像块的高,picW为当前图像的宽,picH为当前图像的高。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the coordinates (x, y) of the pixels are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image; accordingly, the first pre Let the condition be: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH≤picH; the second preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW≤picW, And y+cH>picH; the third preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH; where cW is the width of the current image block, and cH is the current The height of the image block, picW is the width of the current image, and picH is the height of the current image.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,确定单元,还用于若当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界,则至少根据当前图像块的尺寸信息为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,尺寸信息是由块信息获得的;划分单元,还用于按照确定出的强制划分方式对当 前图像块进行划分。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the determining unit is further configured to determine a mandatory division method for the current image block based on the size information of the current image block at least according to the size information of the current image block, size information It is obtained from the block information; the dividing unit is also used to divide the current image block according to the determined forced division method.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,确定单元,还包括:计算子单元、第五确定子单元、第六确定子单元;计算子单元,用于根据尺寸信息,计算当前图像块的宽与高的比值;第五确定子单元,用于若比值大于第四预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,第四预设阈值为正整数;第六确定子单元,用于若比值小于第五预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,第五预设阈值为第四预设阈值的倒数。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the determination unit further includes: a calculation subunit, a fifth determination subunit, and a sixth determination subunit; the calculation subunit is used to calculate the current image block's size based on the size information The ratio of width to height; the fifth determining subunit is used to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method if the ratio is greater than the fourth preset threshold; the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer; the sixth determining subunit Is used to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method if the ratio is less than the fifth preset threshold, and the fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,确定单元,还包括:判断子单元和第七确定子单元;判断子单元,用于判断当前图像块是否为I条带或者I帧;还用于判断当前图像块的宽和高是否均等于第六预设阈值,第六预设阈值为正整数;第七确定子单元,用于若当前图像块为I条带或者I帧,且当前图像块的宽和高均等于第六预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照QT的划分方式划分。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the determination unit further includes: a determination subunit and a seventh determination subunit; the determination subunit is used to determine whether the current image block is an I band or an I frame; To determine whether the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset threshold, the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer; the seventh determination subunit is used if the current image block is I band or I frame, and the current image If the width and height of the block are equal to the sixth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,划分单元,还用于当为所述当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,从所述当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式,并按照所述最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分;或者,当为所述当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,按照所述当前图像块对应的语法元素所指示的划分方式,对所述当前图像块进行划分。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the dividing unit is further used to determine the final division from the division modes allowed for the current image block when the mandatory division mode is not determined for the current image block Method, and divide the current image block according to the final division method; or, when no mandatory division method is determined for the current image block, according to the division method indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block, The current image block is divided.
基于第二方面,在一些可能的实施方式下,划分单元,还用于在按照当前图像块允许使用的划分方式,对当前图像块进行划分之前,根据当前图像块的尺寸信息,确定当前图像块不允许使用的划分方式;其中,若当前图像块的高等于第七预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用HBT的划分方式和VEQT的划分方式,第七预设阈值为最小编码单元的边长;若当前图像块的宽等于第七预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用VBT和HEQT的划分方式;若当前图像块的高小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用HEQT的划分方式,第八预设阈值为第七预设阈值的2倍;若当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用VEQT的划分方式。Based on the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the dividing unit is further used to determine the current image block according to the size information of the current image block before dividing the current image block according to the allowed division method of the current image block The division method that is not allowed to be used; where, if the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the HBT division method and the VEQT division method, and the seventh preset threshold value is that of the smallest coding unit Side length; if the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VBT and HEQT division; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, the current image is determined Blocks are not allowed to use HEQT division. The eighth preset threshold is twice the seventh preset threshold; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VEQT division the way.
第三方面,本申请提供一种视频编码方法,能够应用于视频编码器;视频编码方法包括:执行如上述第一方面的任意一种图像划分方法对当前编码块进行划分;对当前编码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;根据当前编码块和预测块,获得对应的残差块;对残差块进行熵编码,生成对应的码流。In a third aspect, the present application provides a video encoding method that can be applied to a video encoder; the video encoding method includes: performing any of the image division methods described above in the first aspect to divide the current coding block; dividing the current coding block The outgoing CU performs prediction to obtain a corresponding prediction block; obtains a corresponding residual block according to the current coding block and the prediction block; entropy encodes the residual block to generate a corresponding code stream.
第四方面,本申请提供一种视频解码方法,能够应用于视频解码器;视频解码方法包括:执行如上述第一方面的任意一种图像划分方法对当前解码块进行划分;对当前解码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;根据从码流中解析出的残差块和预测块,重建当前解码块。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a video decoding method that can be applied to a video decoder; the video decoding method includes: performing any of the image division methods as described in the first aspect above to divide the current decoding block; dividing the current decoding block The CU is predicted to obtain the corresponding prediction block; according to the residual block and the prediction block parsed from the code stream, the current decoding block is reconstructed.
第五方面,本申请提供一种视频编码器,视频编码器用于编码图像块,包括:如第二方面的任意一种图像块划分装置,其中,图像块划分装置用于从当前图像中获取当前编码块的块信息,当前图像块为当前图像中待编码的图像块;根据块信息,判断当前编码块是否超出当前编码图像的边界;若当前编码块超出当前编码图像的边界,则为当前编码块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前编码块进行划分;第 一预测处理单元,用于对当前编码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;残差计算单元,用于根据当前编码块和预测块,获得对应的残差块;熵编码单元,用于对残差块进行熵编码,生成对应的码流。According to a fifth aspect, the present application provides a video encoder for encoding an image block, including: any one of the image block division devices of the second aspect, wherein the image block division device is used to obtain the current image from the current image The block information of the coding block, the current image block is the image block to be coded in the current image; according to the block information, it is judged whether the current coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coding image; if the current coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coding image, it is the current coding The block determines the forced division mode, and divides the current coding block according to the forced division mode; the first prediction processing unit is used to predict the CU divided by the current coding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; the residual calculation unit is used to According to the current coding block and the prediction block, a corresponding residual block is obtained; an entropy coding unit is used to entropy encode the residual block to generate a corresponding code stream.
第六方面,本申请提供一种视频解码器,视频解码器用于从码流中解码出图像块,包括:如第二方面的任意一种图像块划分装置,其中,图像块划分装置用于从码流中获取当前解码块的块信息,当前解码块为当前图像中待解码的图像块;根据块信息,判断当前解码块是否超出当前解码图像的边界;若当前解码块超出当前解码图像的边界,则为当前解码块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前解码块进行划分;第二预测处理单元,用于对当前解码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;重构单元,用于根据从码流中解析出的残差块和预测块,重建当前解码块。According to a sixth aspect, the present application provides a video decoder for decoding an image block from a code stream, including: any one of the image block division devices of the second aspect, wherein the image block division device is used for Obtain the block information of the current decoded block in the code stream. The current decoded block is the image block to be decoded in the current image; according to the block information, determine whether the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image; if the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image , Determine the mandatory division method for the current decoding block, and divide the current decoding block according to the mandatory division method; the second prediction processing unit is used to predict the CU divided by the current decoding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; reconstruction The unit is used to reconstruct the current decoded block according to the residual block and the prediction block parsed from the code stream.
第七方面,本申请提供一种用于编码视频数据的设备,所述设备包括:In a seventh aspect, the present application provides an apparatus for encoding video data, the apparatus includes:
存储器,用于存储视频数据,所述视频数据包括一个或多个图像块;A memory for storing video data, the video data including one or more image blocks;
视频编码器,用于、从当前图像中获取当前编码块的块信息,当前图像块为当前图像中待编码的图像块;根据块信息,判断当前编码块是否超出当前编码图像的边界;若当前编码块超出当前编码图像的边界,则为当前编码块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前编码块进行划分;对当前编码块划分出的子块进行编码,获得当前编码块对应的码流。The video encoder is used to obtain the block information of the current encoding block from the current image. The current image block is the image block to be encoded in the current image; according to the block information, determine whether the current encoding block exceeds the boundary of the current encoding image; if the current If the coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coded image, determine the mandatory division method for the current coding block, and divide the current coding block according to the mandatory division method; encode the sub-blocks divided by the current coding block to obtain the code corresponding to the current coding block flow.
第八方面,本申请提供一种用于解码视频数据的设备,所述设备包括:In an eighth aspect, the present application provides an apparatus for decoding video data. The apparatus includes:
存储器,用于存储码流形式的视频数据;Memory, used to store video data in the form of code stream;
视频解码器,用于从码流中获取当前解码块的块信息,当前解码块为当前图像中待解码的图像块;根据块信息,判断当前解码块是否超出当前解码图像的边界;若当前解码块超出当前解码图像的边界,则为当前解码块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前解码块进行划分;从码流中解析出当前解码块划分出的子块的编码信息,并根据编码信息重建当前解码块。The video decoder is used to obtain the block information of the current decoding block from the code stream. The current decoding block is the image block to be decoded in the current image; according to the block information, it is determined whether the current decoding block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image; if the current decoding If the block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image, the forced division method is determined for the current decoded block, and the current decoded block is divided according to the forced division method; the coding information of the sub-block divided by the current decoded block is parsed from the code stream, and according to The encoded information reconstructs the current decoded block.
第九方面,本申请提供一种编码设备,包括:相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器,所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行第一方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides an encoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, and the processor calls program codes stored in the memory to perform any one of the methods of the first aspect Part or all of the steps.
第十方面,本申请提供一种解码设备,包括:相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器,所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行第一方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤。According to a tenth aspect, the present application provides a decoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, the processor calling program code stored in the memory to perform any one of the methods of the first aspect Part or all of the steps.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储了程序代码,其中,所述程序代码包括用于执行第一方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤的指令。According to an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores program code, where the program code includes part or all of the method for performing any one of the first aspects Step instructions.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行第一方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to perform part or all of the steps of any one of the methods of the first aspect.
应当理解的是,本申请的第二至十二方面与本申请的第一方面的技术方案一致,各方面及对应的可行实施方式所取得的有益效果相似,不再赘述。It should be understood that the second to twelfth aspects of the present application are consistent with the technical solution of the first aspect of the present application, and the beneficial effects obtained by the various aspects and the corresponding feasible implementation manners are similar and will not be repeated.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION
图1A为本申请实施例中的视频编码及解码系统实例的示意图;1A is a schematic diagram of an example of a video encoding and decoding system in an embodiment of this application;
图1B为本申请实施例中的视频译码系统实例的示意图;1B is a schematic diagram of an example of a video decoding system in an embodiment of this application;
图2为本申请实施例中的编码器实例结构的示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of an example structure of an encoder in an embodiment of this application;
图3为本申请实施例中的解码器实例结构的示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of an example structure of a decoder in an embodiment of this application;
图4为本申请实施例中的视频译码设备实例的示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a video decoding device in an embodiment of this application;
图5为本申请实施例中的一种编码装置或解码装置实例的示意图;5 is a schematic diagram of an example of an encoding device or a decoding device in an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例中的BT、QT以及EQT的划分方式的示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a division manner of BT, QT, and EQT in an embodiment of this application;
图7为本申请实施例中的基于QT-MTT的划分方式的示意图;7 is a schematic diagram of a division method based on QT-MTT in an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例中的图像块划分方法的实施流程示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation process of an image block division method in an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例中的当前图像块超出当前图像边界的示意图;9 is a schematic diagram of the current image block exceeding the current image boundary in the embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例中的图像块划分装置的结构示意图。10 is a schematic structural diagram of an image block division device in an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。以下描述中,参考形成本申请一部分并以说明之方式示出本申请实施例的具体方面或可使用本申请实施例的具体方面的附图。应理解,本申请实施例可在其它方面中使用,并可包括附图中未描绘的结构或逻辑变化。因此,以下详细描述不应以限制性的意义来理解,且本申请的范围由所附权利要求书界定。例如,应理解,结合所描述方法的揭示内容可以同样适用于用于执行所述方法的对应设备或系统,且反之亦然。例如,如果描述一个或多个具体方法步骤,则对应的设备可以包含如功能单元等一个或多个单元,来执行所描述的一个或多个方法步骤(例如,一个单元执行一个或多个步骤,或多个单元,其中每个都执行多个步骤中的一个或多个),即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个单元。另一方面,例如,如果基于如功能单元等一个或多个单元描述具体装置,则对应的方法可以包含一个步骤来执行一个或多个单元的功能性(例如,一个步骤执行一个或多个单元的功能性,或多个步骤,其中每个执行多个单元中一个或多个单元的功能性),即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个步骤。进一步,应理解的是,除非另外明确提出,本文中所描述的各示例性实施例和/或方面的特征可以相互组合。The following describes the embodiments of the present application with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. In the following description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings that form a part of the present application and illustrate specific aspects of the embodiments of the present application by way of illustration or may use specific aspects of the embodiments of the present application. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application may be used in other aspects, and may include structural or logical changes not depicted in the drawings. Therefore, the following detailed description should not be interpreted in a restrictive sense, and the scope of the present application is defined by the appended claims. For example, it should be understood that the disclosure in conjunction with the described method may be equally applicable to the corresponding device or system for performing the method, and vice versa. For example, if one or more specific method steps are described, the corresponding device may contain one or more units such as functional units to perform the one or more method steps described (eg, one unit performs one or more steps , Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings. On the other hand, for example, if a specific device is described based on one or more units such as a functional unit, the corresponding method may include a step to perform the functionality of one or more units (eg, one step executes one or more units Functionality, or multiple steps, each of which performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings. Further, it should be understood that, unless expressly stated otherwise, the features of the exemplary embodiments and/or aspects described herein may be combined with each other.
本申请实施例所涉及的技术方案不仅可能应用于现有的视频编码标准中(如H.264、高性能视频编码(HEVC,High Efficiency Video Coding)等标准),还可能应用于未来的视频编码标准中(如H.266标准)。本申请的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本申请的具体实施例进行解释,而非旨在限定本申请。下面先对本申请实施例可能涉及的一些概念进行简单介绍。The technical solutions involved in the embodiments of the present application may not only be applied to existing video coding standards (such as H.264, High Performance Video Coding (HEVC, High Efficiency, Video Coding) and other standards), but may also be applied to future video coding In the standard (such as H.266 standard). The terminology used in the embodiment section of the present application is only used to explain specific examples of the present application, and is not intended to limit the present application. The following briefly introduces some concepts that may be involved in the embodiments of the present application.
视频编码通常是指处理形成视频或视频序列的图片序列。在视频编码领域,术语“图片(picture)”、“帧(frame)”或“图像(image)”可以用作同义词。本文中使用的视频编码表示视频编码或视频解码。视频编码在源侧执行,通常包括处理(例如,通过压缩)原始视频图片以减少表示该视频图片所需的数据量,从而更高效地存储和/或传输。视频解码在目的地侧执行,通常包括相对于编码器作逆处理,以重构视频图片。实施例涉及的视频图片“编码”应理解为涉及视频序列的“编码” 或“解码”。编码部分和解码部分的组合也称为编解码(编码和解码)。Video coding generally refers to processing a sequence of pictures that form a video or video sequence. In the field of video coding, the terms "picture", "frame" or "image" may be used as synonyms. Video coding as used herein means video coding or video decoding. Video encoding is performed on the source side, and usually includes processing (eg, by compressing) the original video picture to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, thereby storing and/or transmitting more efficiently. Video decoding is performed on the destination side and usually involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video picture. The "encoding" of video pictures involved in the embodiments should be understood as referring to the "encoding" or "decoding" of video sequences. The combination of the encoding part and the decoding part is also called codec (encoding and decoding).
视频序列包括一系列图像(picture),图像被进一步划分为切片(slice),切片再被划分为块(block)。视频编码以块为单位进行编码处理,在一些新的视频编码标准中,块的概念被进一步扩展。比如,在H.264标准中有宏块(MB,Macro Block),宏块可进一步划分成多个可用于预测编码的预测块(partition)。在HEVC标准中,采用编码单元(CU,Coding Unit),预测单元(PU,Prediction Unit)和变换单元(TU,Transform Unit)等基本概念,从功能上划分了多种块单元,并采用全新的基于树结构进行描述。比如CU可以按照四叉树(QT,Quad Tree)进行划分为更小的CU,而更小的CU还可以继续划分,从而形成一种四叉树结构,CU是对编码图像进行划分和编码的基本单元。对于PU和TU也有类似的树结构,PU可以对应预测块,是预测编码的基本单元。对CU按照划分模式进一步划分成多个PU。TU可以对应变换块,是对预测残差进行变换的基本单元。然而,无论CU,PU还是TU,本质上都属于块(或称图像块)的概念。The video sequence includes a series of pictures, which are further divided into slices, and the slices are further divided into blocks. Video coding is performed in units of blocks. In some new video coding standards, the concept of blocks is further expanded. For example, in the H.264 standard, there is a macro block (MB, Macro), which can be further divided into multiple prediction blocks that can be used for predictive coding. In the HEVC standard, basic concepts such as coding unit (CU, Coding Unit), prediction unit (PU, Prediction Unit), and transformation unit (TU, Transform Unit) are used. A variety of block units are functionally divided and new The description is based on the tree structure. For example, the CU can be divided into smaller CUs according to the Quad Tree (QT, Quad Tree), and the smaller CU can continue to be divided to form a quad tree structure. The CU divides and encodes the encoded image Basic unit. There is a similar tree structure for PU and TU. PU can correspond to the prediction block and is the basic unit of predictive coding. The CU is further divided into multiple PUs according to the division mode. The TU can correspond to the transform block and is the basic unit for transforming the prediction residual. However, regardless of CU, PU or TU, they all belong to the concept of block (or image block) in essence.
例如,在HEVC中,通过使用表示为编码树的四叉树结构将CTU拆分为多个CU。在CU层级处作出是否使用图片间(时间)或图片内(空间)预测对图片区域进行编码的决策。每个CU可以根据PU拆分类型进一步拆分为一个、两个或四个PU。一个PU内应用相同的预测过程,并在PU基础上将相关信息传输到解码器。在通过基于PU拆分类型应用预测过程获取残差块之后,可以根据类似于用于CU的编码树的其它四叉树结构将CU分割成变换单元(TU,Transform Unit)。在视频压缩技术最新的发展中,使用四叉树和二叉树(QTBT,Quad-Tree and Binary Tree,)分割帧来分割编码块。在QTBT块结构中,CU可以为正方形或矩形形状。For example, in HEVC, the CTU is split into multiple CUs by using a quadtree structure represented as a coding tree. A decision is made at the CU level whether to use inter-picture (temporal) or intra-picture (spatial) prediction to encode picture regions. Each CU can be further split into one, two, or four PUs according to the PU split type. The same prediction process is applied within a PU, and related information is transmitted to the decoder on the basis of the PU. After acquiring the residual block by applying a prediction process based on the PU split type, the CU may be divided into transform units (TU, Transform Unit) according to other quadtree structures similar to the coding tree used for the CU. In the latest development of video compression technology, quad-tree and binary-tree (QTBT, Quad-Tree and Binary Tree) partition frames are used to split the coding blocks. In the QTBT block structure, the CU may have a square or rectangular shape.
本文中,为了便于描述和理解,可将当前编码图像中待编码的图像块称为当前图像块,例如在编码中,指当前正在编码的块;在解码中,指当前正在解码的块。将参考图像中用于对当前图像块进行预测的已解码的图像块称为参考块,即参考块是为当前图像块提供参考信号的块,其中,参考信号表示图像块内的像素值。可将参考图像中为当前图像块提供预测信号的块为预测块,其中,预测信号表示预测块内的像素值或者采样值或者采样信号。例如,在遍历多个参考块以后,找到了最佳参考块,此最佳参考块将为当前图像块提供预测,此块称为预测块。Here, for ease of description and understanding, the image block to be encoded in the current encoded image may be referred to as the current image block. For example, in encoding, it refers to the block currently being encoded; in decoding, it refers to the block currently being decoded. The decoded image block used to predict the current image block in the reference image is referred to as a reference block, that is, the reference block is a block that provides a reference signal for the current image block, where the reference signal represents a pixel value within the image block. The block in the reference image that provides the prediction signal for the current image block may be a prediction block, where the prediction signal represents a pixel value or a sample value or a sample signal within the prediction block. For example, after traversing multiple reference blocks, the best reference block is found. This best reference block will provide a prediction for the current image block. This block is called a prediction block.
无损视频编码情况下,可以重构原始视频图片,即经重构视频图片具有与原始视频图片相同的质量(假设存储或传输期间没有传输损耗或其它数据丢失)。在有损视频编码情况下,通过例如量化执行进一步压缩,来减少表示视频图片所需的数据量,而解码器侧无法完全重构视频图片,即经重构视频图片的质量相比原始视频图片的质量较低或较差。In the case of lossless video coding, the original video picture can be reconstructed, that is, the reconstructed video picture has the same quality as the original video picture (assuming no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission). In the case of lossy video encoding, further compression is performed by, for example, quantization to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, but the decoder side cannot fully reconstruct the video picture, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video picture is better than the original video picture. The quality is lower or worse.
H.261的几个视频编码标准属于“有损混合型视频编解码”(即,将样本域中的空间和时间预测与变换域中用于应用量化的2D变换编码结合)。视频序列的每个图片通常分割成不重叠的块集合,通常在块层级上进行编码。换句话说,编码器侧通常在块(视频块)层级处理亦即编码视频,例如,通过空间(图片内)预测和时间(图片间)预测来产生预测块,从当前图像块(当前处理或待处理的块)减去预测块以获取残差块,在变换域变换残差块并量化残差块,以减少待传输(压缩)的数据量,而 解码器侧将相对于编码器的逆处理部分应用于经编码或经压缩块,以重构用于表示的当前图像块。另外,编码器复制解码器处理循环,使得编码器和解码器生成相同的预测(例如帧内预测和帧间预测)和/或重构,用于处理亦即编码后续块。Several video coding standards of H.261 belong to "lossy hybrid video codec" (ie, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the sample domain with 2D transform coding for applying quantization in the transform domain). Each picture of a video sequence is usually divided into non-overlapping block sets, which are usually encoded at the block level. In other words, the encoder side usually processes the encoded video at the block (video block) level. For example, the prediction block is generated by spatial (intra-picture) prediction and temporal (inter-picture) prediction. From the current image block (current processing or The block to be processed) subtracts the prediction block to obtain the residual block, transforms the residual block in the transform domain and quantizes the residual block to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted (compressed), and the decoder side will reverse the inverse relative to the encoder The processing part is applied to the encoded or compressed block to reconstruct the current image block for representation. In addition, the encoder duplicates the decoder processing loop so that the encoder and decoder generate the same prediction (eg, intra prediction and inter prediction) and/or reconstruction for processing, ie encoding subsequent blocks.
下面描述本申请实施例所应用的系统架构。参见图1A,图1A示例性地给出了本申请实施例所应用的视频编码及解码系统10的示意性框图。如图1A所示,视频编码及解码系统10可包括源设备12和目的地设备14,源设备12产生经编码视频数据,因此,源设备12可被称为视频编码装置。目的地设备14可对由源设备12所产生的经编码的视频数据进行解码,因此,目的地设备14可被称为视频解码装置。源设备12、目的地设备14或两个的各种实施方案可包含一或多个处理器以及耦合到所述一或多个处理器的存储器。存储器可包含但不限于RAM、ROM、EEPROM、快闪存储器或可用于以可由计算机存取的指令或数据结构的形式存储所要的程序代码的任何其它媒体,如本文所描述。源设备12和目的地设备14可以包括各种装置,包含桌上型计算机、移动计算装置、笔记型(例如,膝上型)计算机、平板计算机、机顶盒、例如所谓的“智能”电话等电话手持机、电视机、相机、显示装置、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、车载计算机、无线通信设备或其类似者。The system architecture applied in the embodiments of the present application is described below. Referring to FIG. 1A, FIG. 1A exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a video encoding and decoding system 10 applied in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1A, the video encoding and decoding system 10 may include a source device 12 and a destination device 14, the source device 12 generates encoded video data, and therefore, the source device 12 may be referred to as a video encoding device. The destination device 14 may decode the encoded video data generated by the source device 12, and therefore, the destination device 14 may be referred to as a video decoding device. Various implementations of source device 12, destination device 14, or both may include one or more processors and memory coupled to the one or more processors. The memory may include, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EEPROM, flash memory, or any other medium that can be used to store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures accessible by the computer, as described herein. Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include various devices, including desktop computers, mobile computing devices, notebook (eg, laptop) computers, tablet computers, set-top boxes, telephone handsets such as so-called "smart" phones, etc. Devices, televisions, cameras, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, in-vehicle computers, wireless communication devices, or the like.
虽然图1A中将源设备12和目的地设备14绘示为单独的设备,但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的地设备14或同时包括两者的功能性,即源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。在此类实施例中,可以使用相同硬件和/或软件,或使用单独的硬件和/或软件,或其任何组合来实施源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。Although the source device 12 and the destination device 14 are depicted as separate devices in FIG. 1A, device embodiments may also include the functionality of both the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie, the source device 12 or The corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality. In such embodiments, the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .
源设备12和目的地设备14之间可通过链路13进行通信连接,目的地设备14可经由链路13从源设备12接收经编码视频数据。链路13可包括能够将经编码视频数据从源设备12移动到目的地设备14的一或多个媒体或装置。在一个实例中,链路13可包括使得源设备12能够实时将经编码视频数据直接发射到目的地设备14的一或多个通信媒体。在此实例中,源设备12可根据通信标准(例如无线通信协议)来调制经编码视频数据,且可将经调制的视频数据发射到目的地设备14。所述一或多个通信媒体可包含无线和/或有线通信媒体,例如射频(RF,Radio Frequency)频谱或一或多个物理传输线。所述一或多个通信媒体可形成基于分组的网络的一部分,基于分组的网络例如为局域网、广域网或全球网络(例如,因特网)。所述一或多个通信媒体可包含路由器、交换器、基站或促进从源设备12到目的地设备14的通信的其它设备。The communication connection between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be via a link 13, and the destination device 14 may receive the encoded video data from the source device 12 via the link 13. Link 13 may include one or more media or devices capable of moving encoded video data from source device 12 to destination device 14. In one example, link 13 may include one or more communication media that enable source device 12 to transmit encoded video data directly to destination device 14 in real time. In this example, the source device 12 may modulate the encoded video data according to a communication standard (eg, a wireless communication protocol), and may transmit the modulated video data to the destination device 14. The one or more communication media may include wireless and/or wired communication media, such as a radio frequency (RF, Radio Frequency) spectrum or one or more physical transmission lines. The one or more communication media may form part of a packet-based network, such as a local area network, a wide area network, or a global network (eg, the Internet). The one or more communication media may include routers, switches, base stations, or other devices that facilitate communication from source device 12 to destination device 14.
源设备12包括编码器20,另外可选地,源设备12还可以包括图片源16、图片预处理器18、以及通信接口22。具体实现形态中,所述编码器20、图片源16、图片预处理器18、以及通信接口22可能是源设备12中的硬件部件,也可能是源设备12中的软件程序。分别描述如下:The source device 12 includes an encoder 20. Alternatively, the source device 12 may further include a picture source 16, a picture pre-processor 18, and a communication interface 22. In a specific implementation form, the encoder 20, the picture source 16, the picture pre-processor 18, and the communication interface 22 may be hardware components in the source device 12, or may be software programs in the source device 12. They are described as follows:
图片源16,可以包括或可以为任何类别的图片捕获设备,用于例如捕获现实世界图片,和/或任何类别的图片或评论(对于屏幕内容编码,屏幕上的一些文字也认为是待编码的图片或图像的一部分)生成设备,例如,用于生成计算机动画图片的计算机图形处理器,或用于获取和/或提供现实世界图片、计算机动画图片(例如,屏 幕内容、虚拟现实(VR,Virtual Reality)图片)的任何类别设备,和/或其任何组合(例如,实景(AR,Augmented Reality)图片)。图片源16可以为用于捕获图片的相机或者用于存储图片的存储器,图片源16还可以包括存储先前捕获或产生的图片和/或获取或接收图片的任何类别的(内部或外部)接口。当图片源16为相机时,图片源16可例如为本地的或集成在源设备中的集成相机;当图片源16为存储器时,图片源16可为本地的或例如集成在源设备中的集成存储器。当所述图片源16包括接口时,接口可例如为从外部视频源接收图片的外部接口,外部视频源例如为外部图片捕获设备,比如相机、外部存储器或外部图片生成设备,外部图片生成设备例如为外部计算机图形处理器、计算机或服务器。接口可以为根据任何专有或标准化接口协议的任何类别的接口,例如有线或无线接口、光接口。Picture source 16, which can include or can be any type of picture capture device, for example to capture real-world pictures, and/or any type of picture or comment (for screen content encoding, some text on the screen is also considered to be encoded Part of the picture or image) generation device, for example, a computer graphics processor for generating computer animation pictures, or for acquiring and/or providing real-world pictures, computer animation pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality (VR, Virtual Reality (picture), any type of device, and/or any combination thereof (for example, Augmented Reality (AR) picture). The picture source 16 may be a camera for capturing pictures or a memory for storing pictures. The picture source 16 may also include any type of (internal or external) interface that stores previously captured or generated pictures and/or acquires or receives pictures. When the picture source 16 is a camera, the picture source 16 may be, for example, a local or integrated camera integrated in the source device; when the picture source 16 is a memory, the picture source 16 may be a local or integrated, for example, integrated in the source device Memory. When the picture source 16 includes an interface, the interface may be, for example, an external interface that receives pictures from an external video source. The external video source is, for example, an external picture capture device, such as a camera, an external memory, or an external picture generation device. The external picture generation device, for example It is an external computer graphics processor, computer or server. The interface may be any type of interface according to any proprietary or standardized interface protocol, such as a wired or wireless interface, an optical interface.
其中,图片可以视为像素点(picture element)的二维阵列或矩阵。阵列中的像素点也可以称为采样点。阵列或图片在水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上的采样点数目定义图片的尺寸和/或分辨率。为了表示颜色,通常采用三个颜色分量,即图片可以表示为或包含三个采样阵列。例如在RBG格式或颜色空间中,图片包括对应的红色、绿色及蓝色采样阵列。但是,在视频编码中,每个像素通常以亮度/色度格式或颜色空间表示,例如对于YUV格式的图片,包括Y指示的亮度分量(有时也可以用L指示)以及U和V指示的两个色度分量。亮度(luma)分量Y表示亮度或灰度水平强度(例如,在灰度等级图片中两者相同),而两个色度(chroma)分量U和V表示色度或颜色信息分量。相应地,YUV格式的图片包括亮度采样值(Y)的亮度采样阵列,和色度值(U和V)的两个色度采样阵列。RGB格式的图片可以转换或变换为YUV格式,反之亦然,该过程也称为色彩变换或转换。如果图片是黑白的,该图片可以只包括亮度采样阵列。本申请实施例中,由图片源16传输至图片处理器的图片也可称为原始图片数据17。The picture can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of picture elements. The pixels in the array can also be called sampling points. The number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the array or picture defines the size and/or resolution of the picture. In order to represent colors, three color components are usually used, that is, a picture can be represented or contain three sampling arrays. For example, in the RBG format or color space, the picture includes corresponding red, green, and blue sampling arrays. However, in video coding, each pixel is usually expressed in a luminance/chrominance format or color space. For example, for a picture in YUV format, it includes the luminance component indicated by Y (sometimes also indicated by L) and the two indicated by U and V. Chroma components. The luma component Y represents luminance or gray-scale horizontal intensity (for example, both are the same in gray-scale pictures), and the two chroma components U and V represent chroma or color information components. Accordingly, the picture in the YUV format includes a luminance sampling array of luminance sampling values (Y), and two chrominance sampling arrays of chrominance values (U and V). RGB format pictures can be converted or transformed into YUV format and vice versa, this process is also called color transformation or conversion. If the picture is black and white, the picture may include only the brightness sampling array. In the embodiment of the present application, the picture transmitted from the picture source 16 to the picture processor may also be referred to as original picture data 17.
图片预处理器18,用于接收原始图片数据17并对原始图片数据17执行预处理,以获取经预处理的图片19或经预处理的图片数据19。例如,图片预处理器18执行的预处理可以包括整修、色彩格式转换(例如,从RGB格式转换为YUV格式)、调色或去噪。The picture pre-processor 18 is configured to receive the original picture data 17 and perform pre-processing on the original picture data 17 to obtain the pre-processed picture 19 or the pre-processed picture data 19. For example, the pre-processing performed by the picture pre-processor 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (eg, conversion from RGB format to YUV format), color grading, or denoising.
编码器20(或称视频编码器20),用于接收经预处理的图片数据19,采用相关预测模式(如本文各个实施例中的预测模式)对经预处理的图片数据19进行处理,从而提供经编码图片数据21(下文将进一步基于图2或图4或图5描述编码器20的结构细节)。在一些实施例中,编码器20可以用于执行后文所描述的各个实施例,以实现本申请所描述的图像块划分方法在编码侧的应用。The encoder 20 (or video encoder 20) is used to receive the pre-processed picture data 19, and process the pre-processed picture data 19 in a related prediction mode (such as the prediction mode in various embodiments herein), thereby The encoded picture data 21 is provided (the structural details of the encoder 20 will be further described below based on FIG. 2 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5). In some embodiments, the encoder 20 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the image block division method described in the present application on the encoding side.
通信接口22,可用于接收经编码图片数据21,并可通过链路13将经编码图片数据21传输至目的地设备14或任何其它设备(如存储器),以用于存储或直接重构,所述其它设备可为任何用于解码或存储的设备。通信接口22可例如用于将经编码图片数据21封装成合适的格式,例如数据包,以在链路13上传输。The communication interface 22 can be used to receive the encoded picture data 21, and can transmit the encoded picture data 21 to the destination device 14 or any other device (such as a memory) via the link 13 for storage or direct reconstruction. The other device may be any device used for decoding or storage. The communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to encapsulate the encoded picture data 21 into a suitable format, such as a data packet, for transmission on the link 13.
目的地设备14包括解码器30,另外可选地,目的地设备14还可以包括通信接口28、图片后处理器32和显示设备34。分别描述如下:The destination device 14 includes a decoder 30, and optionally, the destination device 14 may further include a communication interface 28, a post-picture processor 32, and a display device 34. They are described as follows:
通信接口28,可用于从源设备12或任何其它源接收经编码图片数据21,所述任 何其它源例如为存储设备,存储设备例如为经编码图片数据存储设备。通信接口28可以用于藉由源设备12和目的地设备14之间的链路13或藉由任何类别的网络传输或接收经编码图片数据21,链路13例如为直接有线或无线连接,任何类别的网络例如为有线或无线网络或其任何组合,或任何类别的私网和公网,或其任何组合。通信接口28可以例如用于解封装通信接口22所传输的数据包以获取经编码图片数据21。The communication interface 28 may be used to receive the encoded picture data 21 from the source device 12 or any other source, such as a storage device, such as an encoded picture data storage device. The communication interface 28 can be used to transmit or receive the encoded picture data 21 through the link 13 between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or through any type of network. The link 13 is, for example, a direct wired or wireless connection. A network of a category is, for example, a wired or wireless network or any combination thereof, or a private network and a public network of any category, or any combination thereof. The communication interface 28 may be used, for example, to decapsulate the data packet transmitted by the communication interface 22 to obtain the encoded picture data 21.
通信接口28和通信接口22都可以配置为单向通信接口或者双向通信接口,以及可以用于例如发送和接收消息来建立连接、确认和交换任何其它与通信链路和/或例如经编码图片数据传输的数据传输有关的信息。Both the communication interface 28 and the communication interface 22 may be configured as a one-way communication interface or a two-way communication interface, and may be used, for example, to send and receive messages to establish a connection, confirm and exchange any other communication link and/or for example encoded picture data Information about data transmission.
解码器30(或称为解码器30),用于接收经编码图片数据21并提供经解码图片数据31或经解码图片31(下文将进一步基于图3或图4或图5描述解码器30的结构细节)。在一些实施例中,解码器30可以用于执行后文所描述的各个实施例,以实现本申请所描述的图像块划分方法在解码侧的应用。The decoder 30 (or referred to as the decoder 30) is used to receive the encoded picture data 21 and provide the decoded picture data 31 or the decoded picture 31 (hereinafter, the decoder 30 will be further described based on FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 Structural details). In some embodiments, the decoder 30 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the image block division method described in the present application on the decoding side.
图片后处理器32,用于对经解码图片数据31(也称为经重构图片数据)执行后处理,以获得经后处理图片数据33。图片后处理器32执行的后处理可以包括:色彩格式转换(例如,从YUV格式转换为RGB格式)、调色、整修或重采样,或任何其它处理,还可用于将将经后处理图片数据33传输至显示设备34。The post-picture processor 32 is configured to perform post-processing on the decoded picture data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed picture data) to obtain post-processed picture data 33. The post-processing performed by the image post-processor 32 may include: color format conversion (for example, conversion from YUV format to RGB format), color adjustment, retouching or resampling, or any other processing, and may also be used to convert the post-processed image data 33transmitted to the display device 34.
显示设备34,用于接收经后处理图片数据33以向例如用户或观看者显示图片。显示设备34可以为或可以包括任何类别的用于呈现经重构图片的显示器,例如,集成的或外部的显示器或监视器。例如,显示器可以包括液晶显示器(LCD,Liquid Crystal Display)、有机发光二极管(OLED,Organic Light Emitting Diode)显示器、等离子显示器、投影仪、微LED显示器、硅基液晶(LCoS,Liquid Crystal On Silicon)、数字光处理器(DLP,Digital Light Processor)或任何类别的其它显示器。The display device 34 is used to receive post-processed picture data 33 to display pictures to, for example, a user or a viewer. The display device 34 may be or may include any type of display for presenting reconstructed pictures, for example, an integrated or external display or monitor. For example, the display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD, Liquid) Display, an organic light emitting diode (OLED, Organic Light Emitting Diode) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS, Liquid On Crystal), Digital Light Processor (DLP, Digital Processor) or any other type of display.
虽然,在图1A中将源设备12和目的地设备14绘示为单独的设备,但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的地设备14或同时包括两者的功能性,即源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。在此类实施例中,可以使用相同硬件和/或软件,或使用单独的硬件和/或软件,或其任何组合来实施源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。Although the source device 12 and the destination device 14 are illustrated as separate devices in FIG. 1A, device embodiments may also include the functionality of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and destination device 14 or corresponding functionality. In such embodiments, the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .
本领域技术人员基于描述明显可知,不同单元的功能性或图1A所示的源设备12和/或目的地设备14的功能性的存在和(准确)划分可能根据实际设备和应用有所不同。源设备12和目的地设备14可以包括各种设备中的任一个,包含任何类别的手持或静止设备,例如,笔记本或膝上型计算机、移动电话、智能手机、平板或平板计算机、摄像机、台式计算机、机顶盒、电视机、相机、车载设备、显示设备、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、视频流式传输设备(例如内容服务服务器或内容分发服务器)、广播接收器设备、广播发射器设备等,并可以不使用或使用任何类别的操作系统。It is obvious to those skilled in the art based on the description that the existence and (accurate) division of the functionality of different units or the functionality of the source device 12 and/or the destination device 14 shown in FIG. 1A may vary according to actual devices and applications. Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary devices, such as notebook or laptop computers, mobile phones, smartphones, tablets or tablet computers, cameras, desktops Computers, set-top boxes, televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any kind of operating system.
编码器20和解码器30都可以实施为各种合适电路中的任一个,例如,一个或多个微处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP,Digital Signal Processor)、专用集成电路 (ASIC,Application-Specific Integrated Circuit)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA,Field-Programmable Gate Array)、离散逻辑、硬件或其任何组合。如果部分地以软件实施所述技术,则设备可将软件的指令存储于合适的非暂时性计算机可读存储介质中,且可使用一或多个处理器以硬件执行指令从而执行本申请的技术。前述内容(包含硬件、软件、硬件与软件的组合等)中的任一者可视为一或多个处理器。Both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 can be implemented as any of various suitable circuits, for example, one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSP, Digital Processor), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC, Application- Specific Integrated (Circuit), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA, Field-Programmable Gate Array), discrete logic, hardware, or any combination thereof. If the technology is partially implemented in software, the device may store the instructions of the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, and may use one or more processors to execute the instructions in hardware to perform the technology of the present application . Any one of the foregoing (including hardware, software, a combination of hardware and software, etc.) may be regarded as one or more processors.
在一些情况下,图1A中所示视频编码及解码系统10仅为示例,本申请的技术可以适用于不必包含编码和解码设备之间的任何数据通信的视频编码设置(例如,视频编码或视频解码)。在其它实例中,数据可从本地存储器检索、在网络上流式传输等。视频编码设备可以对数据进行编码并且将数据存储到存储器,和/或视频解码设备可以从存储器检索数据并且对数据进行解码。在一些实例中,由并不彼此通信而是仅编码数据到存储器和/或从存储器检索数据且解码数据的设备执行编码和解码。In some cases, the video encoding and decoding system 10 shown in FIG. 1A is only an example, and the technology of the present application may be applied to video encoding settings that do not necessarily include any data communication between encoding and decoding devices (eg, video encoding or video decoding). In other examples, data can be retrieved from local storage, streamed on the network, and so on. The video encoding device may encode the data and store the data to the memory, and/or the video decoding device may retrieve the data from the memory and decode the data. In some examples, encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other but only encode data to and/or retrieve data from memory and decode the data.
参见图1B,图1B是根据一示例性实施例的包含图2的编码器20和/或图3的解码器30的视频译码系统40的实例的说明图。视频译码系统40可以实现本申请实施例的各种技术的组合。在所说明的实施方式中,视频译码系统40可以包含成像设备41、编码器20、解码器30(和/或藉由处理单元46的逻辑电路47实施的视频编/解码器)、天线42、一个或多个处理器43、一个或多个存储器44和/或显示设备45。Referring to FIG. 1B, FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of an example of a video coding system 40 including the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and/or the decoder 30 of FIG. 3, according to an exemplary embodiment. The video decoding system 40 can implement a combination of various technologies in the embodiments of the present application. In the illustrated embodiment, the video decoding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, an encoder 20, a decoder 30 (and/or a video encoder/decoder implemented by the logic circuit 47 of the processing unit 46), an antenna 42 , One or more processors 43, one or more memories 44, and/or display devices 45.
如图1B所示,成像设备41、天线42、处理单元46、逻辑电路47、编码器20、解码器30、处理器43、存储器44和/或显示设备45能够互相通信。如所论述,虽然用编码器20和解码器30绘示视频译码系统40,但在不同实例中,视频译码系统40可以只包含编码器20或只包含解码器30。As shown in FIG. 1B, the imaging device 41, the antenna 42, the processing unit 46, the logic circuit 47, the encoder 20, the decoder 30, the processor 43, the memory 44, and/or the display device 45 can communicate with each other. As discussed, although the video coding system 40 is shown with the encoder 20 and the decoder 30, in different examples, the video coding system 40 may include only the encoder 20 or only the decoder 30.
在一些实例中,天线42可以用于传输或接收视频数据的经编码比特流。另外,在一些实例中,显示设备45可以用于呈现视频数据。在一些实例中,逻辑电路47可以通过处理单元46实施。处理单元46可以包含ASIC逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。视频译码系统40也可以包含可选的处理器43,该可选处理器43类似地可以包含ASIC逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。在一些实例中,逻辑电路47可以通过硬件实施,如视频编码专用硬件等,处理器43可以通过通用软件、操作系统等实施。另外,存储器44可以是任何类型的存储器,例如易失性存储器(例如,静态随机存取存储器(SRAM,Static Random Access Memory)、动态随机存储器(DRAM,Dynamic Random Access Memory)等)或非易失性存储器(例如,闪存等)等。在非限制性实例中,存储器44可以由超速缓存内存实施。在一些实例中,逻辑电路47可以访问存储器44(例如用于实施图像缓冲器)。在其它实例中,逻辑电路47和/或处理单元46可以包含存储器(例如,缓存等)用于实施图像缓冲器等。In some examples, antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bitstream of video data. Additionally, in some examples, the display device 45 may be used to present video data. In some examples, the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by the processing unit 46. The processing unit 46 may include ASIC logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like. The video decoding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include ASIC logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like. In some examples, the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by hardware, such as dedicated hardware for video encoding, etc., and the processor 43 may be implemented by general-purpose software, an operating system, or the like. In addition, the memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (eg, static random access memory (SRAM, Static Random Access Memory), dynamic random access memory (DRAM, Dynamic Random Access Memory), etc.) or non-volatile Memory (for example, flash memory, etc.), etc. In a non-limiting example, the memory 44 may be implemented by cache memory. In some examples, the logic circuit 47 can access the memory 44 (eg, to implement an image buffer). In other examples, the logic circuit 47 and/or the processing unit 46 may include memory (eg, cache, etc.) for implementing image buffers and the like.
在一些实例中,通过逻辑电路实施的编码器20可以包含(例如,通过处理单元46或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如,通过处理单元46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路47实施的编码器20,以实施参照图2和/或本文中所描述的任何其它编码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。逻辑电路可以用于执行本文所论述的各种操作。In some examples, the encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by the processing unit 46 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by the processing unit 46). The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include the encoder 20 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein. Logic circuits can be used to perform the various operations discussed herein.
在一些实例中,解码器30可以以类似方式通过逻辑电路47实施,以实施参照图 3的解码器30和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。在一些实例中,逻辑电路实施的解码器30可以包含(通过处理单元2820或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如,通过处理单元46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路47实施的解码器30,以实施参照图3和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。In some examples, decoder 30 may be implemented by logic circuit 47 in a similar manner to implement the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein. In some examples, the decoder 30 implemented by the logic circuit may include an image buffer (implemented by the processing unit 2820 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (for example, implemented by the processing unit 46). The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include a decoder 30 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein.
在一些实例中,天线42可以用于接收视频数据的经编码比特流。如所论述,经编码比特流可以包含本文所论述的与编码视频帧相关的数据、指示符、索引值、模式选择数据等,例如与编码分割相关的数据(例如,变换系数或经量化变换系数,(如所论述的)可选指示符,和/或定义编码分割的数据)。视频译码系统40还可包含耦合至天线42并用于解码经编码比特流的解码器30。显示设备45用于呈现视频帧。In some examples, antenna 42 may be used to receive an encoded bitstream of video data. As discussed, the encoded bitstream may include data related to encoded video frames, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc. discussed herein, such as data related to encoded partitions (eg, transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients , (As discussed) optional indicators, and/or data defining the code segmentation). The video coding system 40 may also include a decoder 30 coupled to the antenna 42 and used to decode the encoded bitstream. The display device 45 is used to present video frames.
应理解,本申请实施例中对于参考编码器20所描述的实例,解码器30可以用于执行相反过程。关于信令语法元素,解码器30可以用于接收并解析这种语法元素,相应地解码相关视频数据。在一些例子中,编码器20可以将语法元素熵编码成经编码视频比特流。在此类实例中,解码器30可以解析这种语法元素,并相应地解码相关视频数据。It should be understood that in the example described with reference to the encoder 20 in the embodiment of the present application, the decoder 30 may be used to perform the reverse process. Regarding signaling syntax elements, the decoder 30 may be used to receive and parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly. In some examples, encoder 20 may entropy encode syntax elements into an encoded video bitstream. In such instances, decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例描述的图像块划分方法主要用于图像分割过程,此过程在编码器20和解码器30均存在,本申请实施例中的编码器20和解码器30可以是例如H.263、H.264、HEVV、MPEG-2、MPEG-4、VP8、VP9等视频标准协议或者下一代视频标准协议(如H.266等)对应的编/解码器。It should be noted that the image block division method described in the embodiment of the present application is mainly used in the image segmentation process. This process exists in both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30. The encoder 20 and the decoder 30 in the embodiment of the present application may be For example, H.263, H.264, HEVV, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, VP8, VP9 and other video standard protocols or next-generation video standard protocols (such as H.266, etc.) corresponding codec/decoder.
参见图2,图2示出用于实现本申请实施例的编码器20的实例的示意性/概念性框图。在图2的实例中,编码器20包括残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器单元220、经解码图片缓冲器(DPB,Decoded Picture Buffer)230、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270。预测处理单元260可以包含帧间预测单元244、帧内预测单元254和模式选择单元262。帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计单元和运动补偿单元(未图示)。图2所示的编码器20也可以称为混合型视频编码器或根据混合型视频编解码器的视频编码器。Referring to FIG. 2, FIG. 2 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of an encoder 20 for implementing an embodiment of the present application. In the example of FIG. 2, the encoder 20 includes a residual calculation unit 204, a transform processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, a buffer 216, a loop filter Unit 220, decoded picture buffer (DPB, Decoded Picture Buffer) 230, prediction processing unit 260, and entropy encoding unit 270. The prediction processing unit 260 may include an inter prediction unit 244, an intra prediction unit 254, and a mode selection unit 262. The inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown). The encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a video encoder based on a hybrid video codec.
例如,残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270形成编码器20的前向信号路径,而例如逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器220、DPB230、预测处理单元260形成编码器的后向信号路径,其中编码器的后向信号路径对应于解码器的信号路径(参见图3中的解码器30)。For example, the residual calculation unit 204, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the prediction processing unit 260, and the entropy encoding unit 270 form the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while, for example, the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, the heavy The construction unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop filter 220, the DPB 230, and the prediction processing unit 260 form the backward signal path of the encoder, where the backward signal path of the encoder corresponds to the signal path of the decoder (see FIG. 3). Decoder 30).
编码器20通过例如输入202,接收图片201或图片201的图像块203,例如,形成视频或视频序列的图片序列中的图片。图像块203也可以称为当前图片块或待编码图片块,图片201可以称为当前图片或待编码图片(尤其是在视频编码中将当前图片与其它图片区分开时,其它图片例如同一视频序列亦即也包括当前图片的视频序列中的先前经编码和/或经解码图片)。The encoder 20 receives a picture 201 or an image block 203 of the picture 201 through, for example, an input 202, for example, a picture in a picture sequence forming a video or a video sequence. The image block 203 may also be called a current picture block or a picture block to be encoded, and the picture 201 may be called a current picture or a picture to be encoded (especially when the current picture is distinguished from other pictures in video encoding, the other pictures are the same video sequence, for example That is, the previously encoded and/or decoded pictures in the video sequence of the current picture are also included).
编码器20的实施例可以包括分割单元(图2中未绘示),用于将图片201分割 成多个例如图像块203的块,通常分割成多个不重叠的块。分割单元可以用于对视频序列中所有图片使用相同的块大小以及定义块大小的对应栅格,或用于在图片或子集或图片群组之间更改块大小,并将每个图片分割成对应的块。An embodiment of the encoder 20 may include a division unit (not shown in FIG. 2) for dividing the picture 201 into a plurality of blocks such as image blocks 203, usually into a plurality of non-overlapping blocks. The segmentation unit can be used to use the same block size and corresponding grids that define the block size for all pictures in the video sequence, or to change the block size between pictures or subsets or picture groups, and divide each picture into The corresponding block.
在一个实例中,编码器20的预测处理单元260可以用于执行上述分割技术的任何组合。In one example, the prediction processing unit 260 of the encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the above-mentioned segmentation techniques.
如图片201,图像块203也是或可以视为具有采样值的采样点的二维阵列或矩阵,虽然其尺寸比图片201小。换句话说,图像块203可以包括,例如,一个采样阵列(例如黑白图片201情况下的亮度阵列)或三个采样阵列(例如,彩色图片情况下的一个亮度阵列和两个色度阵列)或依据所应用的色彩格式的任何其它数目和/或类别的阵列。图像块203的水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上采样点的数目定义图像块203的尺寸。Like picture 201, image block 203 is also or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with sample values, although its size is smaller than picture 201. In other words, the image block 203 may include, for example, one sampling array (for example, the brightness array in the case of black and white picture 201) or three sampling arrays (for example, one brightness array and two chroma arrays in the case of color picture) or An array of any other number and/or category depending on the color format applied. The number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the image block 203 defines the size of the image block 203.
如图2所示的编码器20用于逐块编码图片201,例如,对每个图像块203执行编码和预测。The encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode the picture 201 block by block, for example, to perform encoding and prediction on each image block 203.
残差计算单元204用于基于图片图像块203和预测块265(下文提供预测块265的其它细节)计算残差块205,例如,通过逐样本(逐像素)将图片图像块203的样本值减去预测块265的样本值,以在样本域中获取残差块205。The residual calculation unit 204 is used to calculate the residual block 205 based on the picture image block 203 and the prediction block 265 (other details of the prediction block 265 are provided below), for example, by subtracting the sample value of the picture image block 203 sample by sample (pixel by pixel) The sample values of the block 265 are depredicted to obtain the residual block 205 in the sample domain.
变换处理单元206用于在残差块205的样本值上应用例如离散余弦变换(DCT,Discrete Cosine Transform)或离散正弦变换(DST,Discrete Sine Transform)的变换,以在变换域中获取变换系数207。变换系数207也可以称为变换残差系数,并在变换域中表示残差块205。The transform processing unit 206 is used to apply transforms such as discrete cosine transform (DCT, Discrete Cosine Transform) or discrete sine transform (DST, Discrete Sine Transform) to the sample values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain . The transform coefficient 207 may also be called a transform residual coefficient, and represents a residual block 205 in the transform domain.
变换处理单元206可以用于应用DCT/DST的整数近似值,例如为HEVC/H.265指定的变换。与正交DCT变换相比,这种整数近似值通常由某一因子按比例缩放。为了维持经正变换和逆变换处理的残差块的范数,应用额外比例缩放因子作为变换过程的一部分。比例缩放因子通常是基于某些约束条件选择的,例如,比例缩放因子是用于移位运算的2的幂、变换系数的位深度、准确性和实施成本之间的权衡等。例如,在解码器30侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为逆变换(以及在编码器20侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为对应逆变换)指定具体比例缩放因子,以及相应地,可以在编码器20侧通过变换处理单元206为正变换指定对应比例缩放因子。The transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply integer approximations of DCT/DST, such as the transform specified by HEVC/H.265. Compared with the orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by a factor. In order to maintain the norm of the residual block processed by the forward and inverse transform, an additional scaling factor is applied as part of the transform process. The scaling factor is usually selected based on certain constraints. For example, the scaling factor is a power of two used for the shift operation, the bit depth of the transform coefficient, the accuracy, and the trade-off between implementation cost, and so on. For example, a specific scaling factor can be specified for the inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the decoder 30 side (and corresponding inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the encoder 20 side), and accordingly, the encoder can be The 20 side specifies a corresponding scaling factor for the positive transform through the transform processing unit 206.
量化单元208用于例如通过应用标量量化或向量量化来量化变换系数207,以获取经量化变换系数209。经量化变换系数209也可以称为经量化残差系数209。量化过程可以减少与部分或全部变换系数207有关的位深度。例如,可在量化期间将n位变换系数向下舍入到m位变换系数,其中n大于m。可通过调整量化参数(QP,Quantization Parameter)修改量化程度。例如,对于标量量化,可以应用不同的标度来实现较细或较粗的量化。较小量化步长对应较细量化,而较大量化步长对应较粗量化。可以通过QP指示合适的量化步长。例如,量化参数可以为合适的量化步长的预定义集合的索引。例如,较小的量化参数可以对应精细量化(较小量化步长),较大量化参数可以对应粗糙量化(较大量化步长),反之亦然。量化可以包含除以量化步长以及例如通过逆量化210执行的对应的量化或逆量化,或者可以包含乘以量化步长。根据例如HEVC的一些标准的实施例可以使用量化参数来确定量化步长。一般而 言,可以基于量化参数使用包含除法的等式的定点近似来计算量化步长。可以引入额外比例缩放因子来进行量化和反量化,以恢复可能由于在用于量化步长和量化参数的等式的定点近似中使用的标度而修改的残差块的范数。在一个实例实施方式中,可以合并逆变换和反量化的标度。或者,可以使用自定义量化表并在例如比特流中将其从编码器通过信号发送到解码器。量化是有损操作,其中量化步长越大,损耗越大。The quantization unit 208 is used to quantize the transform coefficient 207 by, for example, applying scalar quantization or vector quantization to obtain the quantized transform coefficient 209. The quantized transform coefficient 209 may also be referred to as a quantized residual coefficient 209. The quantization process can reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207. For example, n-bit transform coefficients can be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m. The degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting the quantization parameter (QP, Quantization). For example, for scalar quantization, different scales can be applied to achieve thinner or coarser quantization. A smaller quantization step size corresponds to a finer quantization, and a larger quantization step size corresponds to a coarser quantization. The appropriate quantization step size can be indicated by QP. For example, the quantization parameter may be an index of a predefined set of suitable quantization steps. For example, smaller quantization parameters may correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size), larger quantization parameters may correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size), and vice versa. The quantization may include dividing by the quantization step size and the corresponding quantization or inverse quantization performed by, for example, inverse quantization 210, or may include multiplying the quantization step size. Embodiments according to some standards such as HEVC may use quantization parameters to determine the quantization step size. In general, the quantization step size can be calculated based on the quantization parameter using fixed-point approximation that includes equations for division. Additional scaling factors can be introduced for quantization and inverse quantization to restore the norm of the residual block that may be modified due to the scale used in the fixed-point approximation of the equations for quantization step size and quantization parameter. In an example embodiment, the scale of inverse transform and inverse quantization may be combined. Alternatively, a custom quantization table can be used and signaled from the encoder to the decoder in the bitstream, for example. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step, the greater the loss.
逆量化单元210用于在经量化系数上应用量化单元208的逆量化,以获取经反量化系数211,例如,基于或使用与量化单元208相同的量化步长,应用量化单元208应用的量化方案的逆量化方案。经反量化系数211也可以称为经反量化残差系数211,对应于变换系数207,虽然由于量化造成的损耗通常与变换系数不相同。The inverse quantization unit 210 is used to apply the inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the inverse quantization coefficients 211, for example, based on or using the same quantization step size as the quantization unit 208, apply the quantization scheme applied by the quantization unit 208 Inverse quantization scheme. The inverse quantized coefficient 211 may also be referred to as an inverse quantized residual coefficient 211, which corresponds to the transform coefficient 207, although the loss due to quantization is usually not the same as the transform coefficient.
逆变换处理单元212用于应用变换处理单元206应用的变换的逆变换,例如,逆DCT或逆DST,以在样本域中获取逆变换块213。逆变换块213也可以称为逆变换经反量化块213或逆变换残差块213。The inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to apply the inverse transform of the transform applied by the transform processing unit 206, for example, inverse DCT or inverse DST, to obtain the inverse transform block 213 in the sample domain. The inverse transform block 213 may also be referred to as an inverse transform dequantized block 213 or an inverse transform residual block 213.
重构单元214(例如,求和器214)用于将逆变换块213(即经重构残差块213)添加至预测块265,以在样本域中获取经重构块215,例如,将经重构残差块213的样本值与预测块265的样本值相加。The reconstruction unit 214 (eg, summer 214) is used to add the inverse transform block 213 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 213) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the sample domain, for example, The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 213 and the sample values of the prediction block 265 are added.
可选地,例如线缓冲器216的缓冲器单元216(或简称“缓冲器”216)用于缓冲或存储经重构块215和对应的样本值,用于例如帧内预测。在其它的实施例中,编码器可以用于使用存储在缓冲器单元216中的未经滤波的经重构块和/或对应的样本值来进行任何类别的估计和/或预测,例如帧内预测。Optionally, a buffer unit 216 (or simply "buffer" 216), such as a line buffer 216, is used to buffer or store the reconstructed block 215 and corresponding sample values for, for example, intra prediction. In other embodiments, the encoder may be used to use the unfiltered reconstructed blocks and/or corresponding sample values stored in the buffer unit 216 for any type of estimation and/or prediction, such as intra prediction.
例如,编码器20的实施例可以经配置以使得缓冲器单元216不只用于存储用于帧内预测254的经重构块215,也用于环路滤波器单元220(在图2中未示出),和/或,例如使得缓冲器单元216和经解码图片缓冲器单元230形成一个缓冲器。其它实施例可以用于将经滤波块221和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的块或样本(图2中均未示出)用作帧内预测254的输入或基础。For example, an embodiment of the encoder 20 may be configured such that the buffer unit 216 is used not only to store the reconstructed block 215 for intra prediction 254, but also for the loop filter unit 220 (not shown in FIG. 2) Out), and/or, for example, causing the buffer unit 216 and the decoded picture buffer unit 230 to form a buffer. Other embodiments may be used to use the filtered block 221 and/or blocks or samples from the decoded picture buffer 230 (neither shown in FIG. 2) as an input or basis for intra prediction 254.
环路滤波器单元220(或简称“环路滤波器”220)用于对经重构块215进行滤波以获取经滤波块221,从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。环路滤波器单元220旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器,例如去块滤波器、样本自适应偏移(SAO,Sample-Adaptive Offset)滤波器或其它滤波器,例如双边滤波器、自适应环路滤波器(ALF,Adaptive Loop Filter),或锐化或平滑滤波器,或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元220在图2中示出为环内滤波器,但在其它配置中,环路滤波器单元220可实施为环后滤波器。经滤波块221也可以称为经滤波的经重构块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以在环路滤波器单元220对经重构编码块执行滤波操作之后存储经重构编码块。The loop filter unit 220 (or simply "loop filter" 220) is used to filter the reconstructed block 215 to obtain the filtered block 221, so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality. The loop filter unit 220 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample adaptive offset (SAO) filter or other filters, such as a bilateral filter, a self-adapting filter Adaptive loop filter (ALF, Adaptive Loop Filter), or sharpening or smoothing filter, or collaborative filter. Although the loop filter unit 220 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 2, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter. The filtered block 221 may also be referred to as the filtered reconstructed block 221. The decoded picture buffer 230 may store the reconstructed encoding block after the loop filter unit 220 performs a filtering operation on the reconstructed encoding block.
编码器20(对应地,环路滤波器单元220)的实施例可以用于输出环路滤波器参数(例如,样本自适应偏移信息),例如,直接输出或由熵编码单元270或任何其它熵编码单元熵编码后输出,例如使得解码器30可以接收并应用相同的环路滤波器参数用于解码。Embodiments of the encoder 20 (correspondingly, the loop filter unit 220) may be used to output loop filter parameters (eg, sample adaptive offset information), for example, directly output or by the entropy encoding unit 270 or any other The entropy encoding unit outputs after entropy encoding, for example, so that the decoder 30 can receive and apply the same loop filter parameters for decoding.
DPB230可以为存储参考图片数据供编码器20编码视频数据之用的参考图片存储器。DPB 230可由多种存储器设备中的任一个形成,例如DRAM(包含同步DRAM (synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、磁阻式RAM(magnetoresistive RAM,MRAM)、电阻式RAM(resistive RAM,RRAM))或其它类型的存储器设备。可以由同一存储器设备或单独的存储器设备提供DPB 230和缓冲器216。在某一实例中,DPB230用于存储经滤波块221。DPB230可以进一步用于存储同一当前图片或例如先前经重构图片的不同图片的其它先前的经滤波块,例如先前经重构和经滤波块221,以及可以提供完整的先前经重构亦即经解码图片(和对应参考块和样本)和/或部分经重构当前图片(和对应参考块和样本),例如用于帧间预测。在某一实例中,如果经重构块215无需环内滤波而得以重构,则DPB230用于存储经重构块215。The DPB 230 may be a reference picture memory that stores reference picture data for the encoder 20 to encode video data. DPB 230 can be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as DRAM (including synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), resistive RAM (resistive RAM, RRAM)), or other types Memory device. The DPB 230 and the buffer 216 may be provided by the same memory device or separate memory devices. In a certain example, DPB 230 is used to store filtered block 221. DPB230 can be further used to store other previous filtered blocks of the same current picture or different pictures such as previous reconstructed pictures, such as previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and can provide a complete previous reconstructed ie. The decoded picture (and corresponding reference blocks and samples) and/or partially reconstructed current picture (and corresponding reference blocks and samples), for example, for inter prediction. In a certain example, if the reconstructed block 215 is reconstructed without in-loop filtering, the DPB 230 is used to store the reconstructed block 215.
预测处理单元260,也称为块预测处理单元260,用于接收或获取图像块203(当前图片201的当前图像块203)和经重构图片数据,例如来自缓冲器216的同一(当前)图片的参考样本和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的一个或多个先前经解码图片的参考图片数据231,以及用于处理这类数据进行预测,即提供可以为经帧间预测块245或经帧内预测块255的预测块265。The prediction processing unit 260, also known as the block prediction processing unit 260, is used to receive or acquire the image block 203 (current image block 203 of the current picture 201) and reconstructed picture data, such as the same (current) picture from the buffer 216 Reference samples and/or reference picture data 231 of one or more previously decoded pictures from the decoded picture buffer 230, and used to process such data for prediction, that is, to provide an inter prediction block 245 or The prediction block 265 of the intra prediction block 255.
模式选择单元262可以用于选择预测模式(例如帧内或帧间预测模式)和/或对应的用作预测块265的预测块245或255,以计算残差块205和重构经重构块215。The mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction mode) and/or the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
模式选择单元262的实施例可以用于选择预测模式(例如,从预测处理单元260所支持的那些预测模式中选择),所述预测模式提供最佳匹配或者说最小残差(最小残差意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩),或提供最小信令开销(最小信令开销意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩),或同时考虑或平衡以上两者。模式选择单元262可以用于基于码率失真优化(RDO,Rate Distortion Optimization)确定预测模式,即选择提供最小码率失真优化的预测模式,或选择相关码率失真至少满足预测模式选择标准的预测模式。An embodiment of the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (for example, from those prediction modes supported by the prediction processing unit 260), which provides the best match or the minimum residual (the minimum residual means Better compression in transmission or storage), or provide minimum signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead means better compression in transmission or storage), or consider or balance both at the same time. The mode selection unit 262 may be used to determine a prediction mode based on rate distortion optimization (RDO, Rate Distortion Optimization), that is, select a prediction mode that provides minimum bit rate distortion optimization, or select a prediction mode in which the related rate distortion at least meets the prediction mode selection criteria .
下文将详细解释编码器20的实例(例如,通过预测处理单元260)执行的预测处理和(例如,通过模式选择单元262)执行的模式选择。The prediction process performed by the example of the encoder 20 (for example, by the prediction processing unit 260) and the mode selection (for example, by the mode selection unit 262) will be explained in detail below.
如上文所述,编码器20用于从(预先确定的)预测模式集合中确定或选择最好或最优的预测模式。预测模式集合可以包括例如帧内预测模式和/或帧间预测模式。As described above, the encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from the (predetermined) prediction mode set. The set of prediction modes may include, for example, intra prediction modes and/or inter prediction modes.
帧内预测模式集合可以包括35种不同的帧内预测模式,例如,如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式,或如H.265中定义的方向性模式,或者可以包括67种不同的帧内预测模式,例如,如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式,或如正在发展中的H.266中定义的方向性模式。The intra prediction mode set may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.265, or may include 67 Different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.
在可能的实现中,帧间预测模式集合取决于可用参考图片(即,例如前述存储在DBP 230中的至少部分经解码图片)和其它帧间预测参数,例如取决于是否使用整个参考图片或只使用参考图片的一部分,例如围绕当前图像块的区域的搜索窗区域,来搜索最佳匹配参考块,和/或例如取决于是否应用如半像素和/或四分之一像素内插的像素内插,帧间预测模式集合例如可包括先进运动矢量(AMVP,Advanced Motion Vector Prediction)模式和融合(merge)模式。具体实施中,帧间预测模式集合可包括本申请实施例改进的基于控制点的AMVP模式,以及,改进的基于控制点的merge模式。在一个实例中,帧内预测单元254可以用于执行下文描述的帧间预测技术的任意组合。In a possible implementation, the set of inter prediction modes depends on the available reference pictures (ie, for example, the aforementioned at least partially decoded pictures stored in DBP 230) and other inter prediction parameters, for example, depending on whether the entire reference picture is used or only Use a part of the reference picture, for example a search window area surrounding the area of the current image block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or for example depending on whether to apply inter-pixel interpolation such as half-pixel and/or quarter-pixel interpolation Interpolation, the set of inter prediction modes may include, for example, Advanced Motion Vector (AMVP, Advanced Vector) Prediction) mode and merge mode. In a specific implementation, the set of inter prediction modes may include an improved control point-based AMVP mode according to an embodiment of the present application, and an improved control point-based merge mode. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques described below.
除了以上预测模式,本申请实施例也可以应用跳过模式和/或直接模式。In addition to the above prediction modes, the embodiments of the present application may also apply skip mode and/or direct mode.
预测处理单元260可以进一步用于将图像块203分割成较小的块分区或子块,例如,通过迭代使用QT分割、BT分割或三叉树(TT,Triple-Tree)分割,或其任何组合,以及用于例如为块分区或子块中的每一个执行预测,其中模式选择包括选择分割的图像块203的树结构和选择应用于块分区或子块中的每一个的预测模式。The prediction processing unit 260 may be further used to divide the image block 203 into smaller block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, iteratively using QT, BT, or Triple-Tree (TT), or any combination thereof, And for, for example, performing prediction for each of the block partitions or sub-blocks, where mode selection includes selecting a tree structure of the divided image block 203 and selecting a prediction mode applied to each of the block partitions or sub-blocks.
帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计(ME,Motion Estimation)单元(图2中未示出)和运动补偿(MC,Motion Compensation)单元(图2中未示出)。运动估计单元用于接收或获取图片图像块203(当前图片201的当前图片图像块203)和经解码图片231,或至少一个或多个先前经重构块,例如,一个或多个其它/不同先前经解码图片231的经重构块,来进行运动估计。例如,视频序列可以包括当前图片和先前经解码图片31,或换句话说,当前图片和先前经解码图片31可以是形成视频序列的图片序列的一部分,或者形成该图片序列。The inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME, Motion) unit (not shown in FIG. 2) and a motion compensation (MC, Motion Compensation) unit (not shown in FIG. 2). The motion estimation unit is used to receive or acquire a picture image block 203 (current picture image block 203 of the current picture 201) and a decoded picture 231, or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example, one or more other/different The reconstructed block of the previously decoded picture 231 is used for motion estimation. For example, the video sequence may include the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31, or in other words, the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31 may be part of the picture sequence forming the video sequence, or form the picture sequence.
例如,编码器20可以用于从多个其它图片中的同一或不同图片的多个参考块中选择参考块,并向运动估计单元(图2中未示出)提供参考图片和/或提供参考块的位置(X、Y坐标)与当前图像块的位置之间的偏移(空间偏移)作为帧间预测参数。该偏移也称为运动向量(MV,Motion Vector)。For example, the encoder 20 may be used to select a reference block from multiple reference blocks of the same or different pictures in multiple other pictures, and provide a reference picture and/or provide a reference to a motion estimation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) The offset (spatial offset) between the position of the block (X, Y coordinates) and the position of the current image block is used as an inter prediction parameter. This offset is also called Motion Vector (MV, Motion Vector).
运动补偿单元用于获取帧间预测参数,并基于或使用帧间预测参数执行帧间预测来获取帧间预测块245。由运动补偿单元(图2中未示出)执行的运动补偿可以包含基于通过运动估计(可能执行对子像素精确度的内插)确定的运动/块向量取出或生成预测块。内插滤波可从已知像素样本产生额外像素样本,从而潜在地增加可用于编码图片块的候选预测块的数目。一旦接收到用于当前图片块的PU的运动向量,运动补偿单元246可以在一个参考图片列表中定位运动向量指向的预测块。运动补偿单元246还可以生成与块和视频条带相关联的语法元素,以供解码器30在解码视频条带的图片块时使用。The motion compensation unit is used to acquire inter prediction parameters, and perform inter prediction based on or using inter prediction parameters to obtain inter prediction blocks 245. The motion compensation performed by the motion compensation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) may include extracting or generating a prediction block based on a motion/block vector determined by motion estimation (possibly performing interpolation of sub-pixel accuracy). Interpolation filtering can generate additional pixel samples from known pixel samples, potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode picture blocks. Once the motion vector for the PU of the current picture block is received, the motion compensation unit 246 may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in a reference picture list. Motion compensation unit 246 may also generate syntax elements associated with blocks and video slices for use by decoder 30 when decoding picture blocks of video slices.
具体的,上述帧间预测单元244可向熵编码单元270传输语法元素,所述语法元素包括帧间预测参数(比如遍历多个帧间预测模式后选择用于当前图像块预测的帧间预测模式的指示信息)。可能应用场景中,如果帧间预测模式只有一种,那么也可以不在语法元素中携带帧间预测参数,此时解码端30可直接使用默认的预测模式进行解码。可以理解的,帧间预测单元244可以用于执行帧间预测技术的任意组合。Specifically, the above-mentioned inter prediction unit 244 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes inter prediction parameters (such as traversing multiple inter prediction modes to select an inter prediction mode used for current image block prediction Instructions). In a possible application scenario, if there is only one inter prediction mode, the inter prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element. In this case, the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding. It can be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques.
帧内预测单元254用于获取,例如接收同一图片的图片块203(当前图片块)和一个或多个先前经重构块,例如经重构相相邻块,以进行帧内估计。例如,编码器20可以用于从多个(预定)帧内预测模式中选择帧内预测模式。The intra prediction unit 254 is used to acquire, for example, a picture block 203 (current picture block) that receives the same picture and one or more previously reconstructed blocks, such as reconstructed neighboring blocks, for intra estimation. For example, the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode from a plurality of (predetermined) intra prediction modes.
编码器20的实施例可以用于基于优化标准选择帧内预测模式,例如基于最小残差(例如,提供最类似于当前图片块203的预测块255的帧内预测模式)或最小码率失真。Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode based on optimization criteria, for example, based on a minimum residual (eg, an intra prediction mode that provides the prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or minimum rate distortion.
帧内预测单元254进一步用于基于如所选择的帧内预测模式的帧内预测参数确定帧内预测块255。在任何情况下,在选择用于块的帧内预测模式之后,帧内预测单元254还用于向熵编码单元270提供帧内预测参数,即提供指示所选择的用于块的帧内预测模式的信息。在一个实例中,帧内预测单元254可以用于执行帧内预测技术的任 意组合。The intra prediction unit 254 is further used to determine the intra prediction block 255 based on the intra prediction parameters of the intra prediction mode as selected. In any case, after selecting the intra-prediction mode for the block, the intra-prediction unit 254 is also used to provide the intra-prediction parameters to the entropy encoding unit 270, that is, to provide an indication of the selected intra-prediction mode for the block Information. In one example, intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of intra prediction techniques.
具体的,上述帧内预测单元254可向熵编码单元270传输语法元素,所述语法元素包括帧内预测参数(比如遍历多个帧内预测模式后选择用于当前图像块预测的帧内预测模式的指示信息)。可能应用场景中,如果帧内预测模式只有一种,那么也可以不在语法元素中携带帧内预测参数,此时解码端30可直接使用默认的预测模式进行解码。Specifically, the above-mentioned intra-prediction unit 254 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes intra-prediction parameters (such as traversing multiple intra-prediction modes to select an intra-prediction mode for prediction of the current image block Instructions). In a possible application scenario, if there is only one intra prediction mode, the intra prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element. In this case, the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding.
熵编码单元270用于将熵编码算法或方案(例如,可变长度编码(VLC,Variable Length Coding)方案、上下文自适应VLC(CAVLC,Context Adaptive VLC)方案、算术编码方案、上下文自适应二进制算术编码(CABAC,Context Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding)、基于语法的上下文自适应二进制算术编码(SBAC,Syntax-Based context-adaptive binary Arithmetic Coding)、概率区间分割熵(PIPE,Probability Interval Partitioning Entropy)编码或其它熵编码方法或技术)应用于经量化残差系数209、帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或环路滤波器参数中的单个或所有上(或不应用),以获取可以通过输出272以例如经编码比特流21的形式输出的经编码图片数据21。可以将经编码比特流传输到视频解码器30,或将其存档稍后由视频解码器30传输或检索。熵编码单元270还可用于熵编码正被编码的当前视频条带的其它语法元素。The entropy coding unit 270 is used to entropy coding algorithms or schemes (for example, variable length coding (VLC, Variable) Coding) schemes, context adaptive VLC (CAVLC, Context Adaptive VLC) schemes, arithmetic coding schemes, context adaptive binary arithmetic Coding (CABAC, Context Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding), grammar-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding (SBAC, Syntax-Based context-adaptive binary Arithmetic Coding), probability interval segmentation entropy (PIPE, Probability Interval Partitioning Entropy) coding or other entropy Coding method or technique) applied to a single or all of the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or loop filter parameters (or not applied) to obtain the output 272 to For example, the encoded picture data 21 output in the form of an encoded bit stream 21. The encoded bitstream may be transmitted to the video decoder 30 or archived for later transmission or retrieval by the video decoder 30. The entropy encoding unit 270 may also be used to entropy encode other syntax elements of the current video slice being encoded.
视频编码器20的其它结构变型可用于编码视频流。例如,基于非变换的编码器20可以在没有针对某些块或帧的变换处理单元206的情况下直接量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中,编码器20可具有组合成单个单元的量化单元208和逆量化单元210。Other structural variations of video encoder 20 may be used to encode video streams. For example, the non-transform based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without the transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames. In another embodiment, the encoder 20 may have a quantization unit 208 and an inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
具体的,在本申请实施例中,编码器20可用于实现后文实施例中描述的图像块划分方法。Specifically, in the embodiment of the present application, the encoder 20 may be used to implement the image block division method described in the embodiments below.
应当理解的是,视频编码器20的其它的结构变化可用于编码视频流。例如,对于某些图像块或者图像帧,视频编码器20可以直接地量化残差信号而不需要经变换处理单元206处理,相应地也不需要经逆变换处理单元212处理;或者,对于某些图像块或者图像帧,视频编码器20没有产生残差数据,相应地不需要经变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210和逆变换处理单元212处理;或者,视频编码器20可以将经重构图像块作为参考块直接地进行存储而不需要经滤波器220处理;或者,视频编码器20中量化单元208和逆量化单元210可以合并在一起。环路滤波器220是可选的,以及针对无损压缩编码的情况下,变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210和逆变换处理单元212是可选的。应当理解的是,根据不同的应用场景,帧间预测单元244和帧内预测单元254可以是被选择性的启用。It should be understood that other structural changes of the video encoder 20 may be used to encode the video stream. For example, for some image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 can directly quantize the residual signal without processing by the transform processing unit 206, and accordingly, without processing by the inverse transform processing unit 212; or, for some For image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 does not generate residual data, and accordingly does not need to be processed by the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212; or, the video encoder 20 may convert The reconstructed image block is directly stored as a reference block without being processed by the filter 220; alternatively, the quantization unit 208 and the inverse quantization unit 210 in the video encoder 20 may be merged together. The loop filter 220 is optional, and in the case of lossless compression coding, the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212 are optional. It should be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 and the intra prediction unit 254 may be selectively enabled according to different application scenarios.
参见图3,图3示出用于实现本申请实施例的解码器30的实例的示意性/概念性框图。视频解码器30用于接收例如由编码器20编码的经编码图片数据(例如,经编码比特流)21,以获取经解码图片231。在解码过程期间,视频解码器30从视频编码器20接收视频数据,例如表示经编码视频条带的图片块的经编码视频比特流及相关联的语法元素。Referring to FIG. 3, FIG. 3 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of a decoder 30 for implementing an embodiment of the present application. The video decoder 30 is used to receive encoded picture data (eg, encoded bitstream) 21, for example, encoded by the encoder 20, to obtain the decoded picture 231. During the decoding process, video decoder 30 receives video data from video encoder 20, such as an encoded video bitstream and associated syntax elements representing picture blocks of the encoded video slice.
在图3的实例中,解码器30包括熵解码单元304、逆量化单元310、逆变换处理 单元312、重构单元314(例如求和器314)、缓冲器316、环路滤波器320、经解码图片缓冲器330以及预测处理单元360。预测处理单元360可以包含帧间预测单元344、帧内预测单元354和模式选择单元362。在一些实例中,视频解码器30可执行大体上与参照图2的视频编码器20描述的编码遍次互逆的解码遍次。In the example of FIG. 3, the decoder 30 includes an entropy decoding unit 304, an inverse quantization unit 310, an inverse transform processing unit 312, a reconstruction unit 314 (such as a summer 314), a buffer 316, a loop filter 320, a The decoded picture buffer 330 and the prediction processing unit 360. The prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344, an intra prediction unit 354, and a mode selection unit 362. In some examples, video decoder 30 may perform a decoding pass that is generally inverse to the encoding pass described with reference to video encoder 20 of FIG. 2.
熵解码单元304用于对经编码图片数据21执行熵解码,以获取例如经量化系数309和/或经解码的编码参数(图3中未示出),例如,帧间预测、帧内预测参数、环路滤波器参数和/或其它语法元素中(经解码)的任意一个或全部。熵解码单元304进一步用于将帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或其它语法元素转发至预测处理单元360。视频解码器30可接收视频条带层级和/或视频块层级的语法元素。The entropy decoding unit 304 is used to perform entropy decoding on the encoded picture data 21 to obtain, for example, quantized coefficients 309 and/or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3), for example, inter prediction, intra prediction parameters , Any or all of the loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements (decoded). The entropy decoding unit 304 is further used to forward inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or other syntax elements to the prediction processing unit 360. Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice level and/or the video block level.
逆量化单元310功能上可与逆量化单元110相同,逆变换处理单元312功能上可与逆变换处理单元212相同,重构单元314功能上可与重构单元214相同,缓冲器316功能上可与缓冲器216相同,环路滤波器320功能上可与环路滤波器220相同,经解码图片缓冲器330功能上可与经解码图片缓冲器230相同。The inverse quantization unit 310 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110, the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally the same as the inverse transform processing unit 212, the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214, and the buffer 316 may be functionally Like the buffer 216, the loop filter 320 may be functionally the same as the loop filter 220, and the decoded picture buffer 330 may be functionally the same as the decoded picture buffer 230.
预测处理单元360可以包括帧间预测单元344和帧内预测单元354,其中帧间预测单元344功能上可以类似于帧间预测单元244,帧内预测单元354功能上可以类似于帧内预测单元254。预测处理单元360通常用于执行块预测和/或从经编码数据21获取预测块365,以及从例如熵解码单元304(显式地或隐式地)接收或获取预测相关参数和/或关于所选择的预测模式的信息。The prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354, wherein the inter prediction unit 344 may be similar in function to the inter prediction unit 244, and the intra prediction unit 354 may be similar in function to the intra prediction unit 254 . The prediction processing unit 360 is generally used to perform block prediction and/or obtain the prediction block 365 from the encoded data 21, and receive or obtain prediction-related parameters and/or information about the entropy decoding unit 304 (explicitly or implicitly). Information about the selected prediction mode.
当视频条带经编码为经帧内编码(I)条带时,预测处理单元360的帧内预测单元354用于基于信号表示的帧内预测模式及来自当前帧或图片的先前经解码块的数据来产生用于当前视频条带的图片块的预测块365。当视频帧经编码为经帧间编码(即B或P)条带时,预测处理单元360的帧间预测单元344(例如,运动补偿单元)用于基于运动向量及从熵解码单元304接收的其它语法元素生成用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测块365。对于帧间预测,可从一个参考图片列表内的一个参考图片中产生预测块。视频解码器30可基于存储于DPB 330中的参考图片,使用默认建构技术来建构参考帧列表:列表0和列表1。When the video slice is encoded as an intra-coded (I) slice, the intra prediction unit 354 of the prediction processing unit 360 is used to signal-based the intra prediction mode and the previous decoded block from the current frame or picture. Data to generate a prediction block 365 for the picture block of the current video slice. When the video frame is encoded as an inter-coded (ie, B or P) slice, the inter prediction unit 344 (eg, motion compensation unit) of the prediction processing unit 360 is used for the motion vector-based and received from the entropy decoding unit 304 Other syntax elements generate a prediction block 365 for the video block of the current video slice. For inter prediction, a prediction block may be generated from a reference picture in a reference picture list. The video decoder 30 may construct the reference frame lists: list 0 and list 1 based on the reference pictures stored in the DPB 330 using default construction techniques.
预测处理单元360用于通过解析运动向量和其它语法元素,确定用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测信息,并使用预测信息产生用于正经解码的当前视频块的预测块。在本申请的一实例中,预测处理单元360使用接收到的一些语法元素确定用于编码视频条带的视频块的预测模式(例如,帧内或帧间预测)、帧间预测条带类型(例如,B条带、P条带或GPB条带)、用于条带的参考图片列表中的一个或多个的建构信息、用于条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的运动向量、条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的帧间预测状态以及其它信息,以解码当前视频条带的视频块。在本申请的另一实例中,视频解码器30从比特流接收的语法元素包含接收自适应参数集(APS,Adaptive Parameter Set)、序列参数集(SPS,Sequence Parameter Set)、图片参数集(PPS,Picture Parameter Set)或条带标头中的一个或多个中的语法元素。The prediction processing unit 360 is used to determine the prediction information for the video block of the current video slice by parsing the motion vector and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate the prediction block for the current video block being decoded. In an example of the present application, the prediction processing unit 360 uses some received syntax elements to determine the prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction) of the video block used to encode the video slice, and the inter prediction slice type ( For example, B slice, P slice, or GPB slice), construction information of one or more of the reference picture lists for slices, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block for slices, The inter prediction status and other information of each inter-coded video block of the slice to decode the video block of the current video slice. In another example of the present application, the syntax elements received by the video decoder 30 from the bitstream include receiving an adaptive parameter set (APS, Adaptive Parameter Set), sequence parameter set (SPS, Sequence Parameter Set), and picture parameter set (PPS , Picture, Parameter, or one or more of the syntax elements in the stripe header.
逆量化单元310可用于逆量化(即,反量化)在比特流中提供且由熵解码单元304解码的经量化变换系数。逆量化过程可包含使用由视频编码器20针对视频条带中的每一视频块所计算的量化参数来确定应该应用的量化程度并同样确定应该应用的 逆量化程度。The inverse quantization unit 310 may be used to inverse quantize (ie, inverse quantize) the quantized transform coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304. The inverse quantization process may include using the quantization parameters calculated by the video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization that should be applied and also determine the degree of inverse quantization that should be applied.
逆变换处理单元312用于将逆变换(例如,逆DCT、逆整数变换或概念上类似的逆变换过程)应用于变换系数,以便在像素域中产生残差块。The inverse transform processing unit 312 is used to apply an inverse transform (eg, inverse DCT, inverse integer transform, or conceptually similar inverse transform process) to the transform coefficients, so as to generate a residual block in the pixel domain.
重构单元314(例如,求和器314)用于将逆变换块313(即经重构残差块313)添加到预测块365,以在样本域中获取经重构块315,例如通过将经重构残差块313的样本值与预测块365的样本值相加。The reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314) is used to add the inverse transform block 313 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 313) to the prediction block 365 to obtain the reconstructed block 315 in the sample domain, for example by The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 313 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 365.
环路滤波器单元320(在编码循环期间或在编码循环之后)用于对经重构块315进行滤波以获取经滤波块321,从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。在一个实例中,环路滤波器单元320可以用于执行下文描述的滤波技术的任意组合。环路滤波器单元320旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器,例如去块滤波器、SAO滤波器或其它滤波器,例如双边滤波器、ALF,或锐化或平滑滤波器,或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元320在图3中示出为环内滤波器,但在其它配置中,环路滤波器单元320可实施为环后滤波器。The loop filter unit 320 (during the encoding loop or after the encoding loop) is used to filter the reconstructed block 315 to obtain the filtered block 321 to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality. In one example, the loop filter unit 320 may be used to perform any combination of filtering techniques described below. The loop filter unit 320 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, SAO filters, or other filters, such as bilateral filters, ALF, or sharpening or smoothing filters, or collaborative filtering Device. Although the loop filter unit 320 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 3, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
随后将给定帧或图片中的经解码视频块321存储在存储用于后续运动补偿的参考图片的经解码图片缓冲器330中。The decoded video block 321 in a given frame or picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 that stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation.
解码器30用于例如,藉由输出332输出经解码图片31,以向用户呈现或供用户查看。The decoder 30 is used, for example, to output the decoded picture 31 through the output 332 for presentation to the user or for the user to view.
视频解码器30的其它变型可用于对压缩的比特流进行解码。例如,解码器30可以在没有环路滤波器单元320的情况下生成输出视频流。例如,基于非变换的解码器30可以在没有针对某些块或帧的逆变换处理单元312的情况下直接逆量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中,视频解码器30可以具有组合成单个单元的逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312。Other variations of video decoder 30 may be used to decode the compressed bitstream. For example, the decoder 30 may generate the output video stream without the loop filter unit 320. For example, the non-transform based decoder 30 may directly inversely quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames. In another embodiment, the video decoder 30 may have an inverse quantization unit 310 and an inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
具体的,在本申请实施例中,解码器30用于实现后文实施例中描述的图像块划分方法。Specifically, in the embodiment of the present application, the decoder 30 is used to implement the image block division method described in the embodiment below.
应当理解的是,视频解码器30的其它结构变化可用于解码经编码视频位流。例如,视频解码器30可以不经滤波器320处理而生成输出视频流;或者,对于某些图像块或者图像帧,视频解码器30的熵解码单元304没有解码出经量化的系数,相应地不需要经逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312处理。环路滤波器320是可选的;以及针对无损压缩的情况下,逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312是可选的。应当理解的是,根据不同的应用场景,帧间预测单元和帧内预测单元可以是被选择性的启用。It should be understood that other structural variations of video decoder 30 may be used to decode the encoded video bitstream. For example, the video decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without processing by the filter 320; or, for certain image blocks or image frames, the entropy decoding unit 304 of the video decoder 30 does not decode the quantized coefficients, and accordingly does not It needs to be processed by the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312. The loop filter 320 is optional; and in the case of lossless compression, the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312 are optional. It should be understood that, according to different application scenarios, the inter prediction unit and the intra prediction unit may be selectively enabled.
应当理解的是,本申请的编码器20和解码器30中,针对某个环节的处理结果可以经过进一步处理后,输出到下一个环节,例如,在插值滤波、运动矢量推导或环路滤波等环节之后,对相应环节的处理结果进一步进行Clip或移位shift等操作。It should be understood that in the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 of the present application, the processing results for a certain link can be further processed and output to the next link, for example, in interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering, etc. After the link, the results of the corresponding link are further clipped or shift shifted.
例如,按照相邻仿射编码块的运动矢量推导得到的当前图像块的控制点的运动矢量,或者推导得到的当前图像块的子块的运动矢量,可以经过进一步处理,本申请对此不做限定。例如,对运动矢量的取值范围进行约束,使其在一定的位宽内。假设允许的运动矢量的位宽为bitDepth,则运动矢量的范围为-2^(bitDepth-1)~2^(bitDepth-1)-1,其中“^”符号表示幂次方。如bitDepth为16,则取值范围为- 32768~32767。如bitDepth为18,则取值范围为-131072~131071。又例如,对运动矢量(例如一个8x8图像块内的四个4x4子块的运动矢量MV)的取值进行约束,使得所述四个4×4子块MV的整数部分之间的最大差值不超过N个像素,例如不超过一个像素。For example, the motion vector of the control point of the current image block derived from the motion vector of the adjacent affine coding block, or the motion vector of the sub-block of the current image block derived, may be further processed, and this application does not limited. For example, the value range of the motion vector is constrained to be within a certain bit width. Assuming that the allowed bit width of the motion vector is bitDepth, the range of the motion vector is -2^(bitDepth-1)~2^(bitDepth-1)-1, where the “^” symbol represents the power. If bitDepth is 16, the value range is -32768~32767. If bitDepth is 18, the value ranges from -131072 to 131071. For another example, the value of the motion vector (such as the motion vectors MV of four 4x4 sub-blocks in an 8x8 image block) is constrained so that the maximum difference between the integer parts of the four 4×4 sub-blocks MV No more than N pixels, for example no more than one pixel.
可以通过以下两种方式进行约束,使其在一定的位宽内:It can be constrained in the following two ways to make it within a certain bit width:
方式1,将运动矢量溢出的高位去除:Method 1: Remove the high bits of the motion vector overflow:
ux=(vx+2 bitDepth)%2 bitDepth ux=(vx+2 bitDepth )%2 bitDepth
vx=(ux>=2 bitDepth-1)?(ux-2 bitDepth):ux vx=(ux>=2 bitDepth-1 )? (ux-2 bitDepth ):ux
uy=(vy+2 bitDepth)%2 bitDepth uy=(vy+2 bitDepth )%2 bitDepth
vy=(uy>=2 bitDepth-1)?(uy-2 bitDept):uy vy=(uy>=2 bitDepth-1 )? (uy-2 bitDept ):uy
其中,vx为图像块或所述图像块的子块的运动矢量的水平分量,vy为图像块或所述图像块的子块的运动矢量的垂直分量,ux和uy为中间值;bitDepth表示位宽。Where vx is the horizontal component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block, vy is the vertical component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block, ux and uy are intermediate values; bitDepth represents the bit width.
例如vx的值为-32769,通过以上公式得到的为32767。因为在计算机中,数值是以二进制的补码形式存储的,-32769的二进制补码为1,0111,1111,1111,1111(17位),计算机对于溢出的处理为丢弃高位,则vx的值为0111,1111,1111,1111,则为32767,与通过公式处理得到的结果一致。For example, the value of vx is -32769, and the value obtained by the above formula is 32767. Because in the computer, the value is stored in the form of two's complement, the complement of -32769 is 1,0111,1111,1111,1111 (17 bits), the computer handles the overflow as discarding the high bit, then the value of vx If it is 0111,1111,1111,1111, it is 32767, which is consistent with the result obtained by formula processing.
方法2,将运动矢量进行Clipping,如以下公式所示:Method 2: Clipping the motion vector, as shown in the following formula:
vx=Clip3(-2 bitDepth-1,2 bitDepth-1-1,vx) vx=Clip3 (-2 bitDepth-1 , 2 bitDepth-1 -1, vx)
vy=Clip3(-2 bitDepth-1,2 bitDepth-1-1,vy) vy=Clip3 (-2 bitDepth-1 , 2 bitDepth-1 -1, vy)
其中vx为图像块或所述图像块的子块的运动矢量的水平分量,vy为图像块或所述图像块的子块的运动矢量的垂直分量;其中,x、y和z分别对应MV钳位过程Clip3的三个输入值,所述Clip3的定义为,表示将z的值钳位到区间[x,y]之间:Where vx is the horizontal component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block, and vy is the vertical component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block; where x, y, and z correspond to the MV clamp, respectively The three input values of the Clip3 in the bit process. The definition of Clip3 is that the value of z is clamped to the interval [x, y]:
Figure PCTCN2019127075-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019127075-appb-000001
参见图4,图4是本申请实施例提供的视频译码设备400(例如视频编码设备400或视频解码设备400)的结构示意图。视频译码设备400适于实施本文所描述的实施例。在一个实施例中,视频译码设备400可以是视频解码器(例如图1A的解码器30)或视频编码器(例如图1A的编码器20)。在另一个实施例中,视频译码设备400可以是上述图1A的解码器30或图1A的编码器20中的一个或多个组件。Referring to FIG. 4, FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoding device 400 (for example, a video encoding device 400 or a video decoding device 400) provided by an embodiment of the present application. The video coding apparatus 400 is suitable for implementing the embodiments described herein. In one embodiment, the video coding device 400 may be a video decoder (eg, decoder 30 of FIG. 1A) or a video encoder (eg, encoder 20 of FIG. 1A). In another embodiment, the video decoding device 400 may be one or more components in the decoder 30 of FIG. 1A or the encoder 20 of FIG. 1A described above.
视频译码设备400包括:用于接收数据的入口端口410和接收单元(Rx)420,用于处理数据的处理器、逻辑单元或中央处理器(CPU)430,用于传输数据的发射器单元(Tx)440和出口端口450,以及,用于存储数据的存储器460。视频译码设备400还可以包括与入口端口410、接收器单元420、发射器单元440和出口端口450耦合的光电转换组件和电光(EO)组件,用于光信号或电信号的出口或入口。The video decoding device 400 includes: an inlet port 410 for receiving data and a receiving unit (Rx) 420, a processor for processing data, a logic unit or a central processing unit (CPU) 430, and a transmitter unit for transmitting data (Tx) 440 and exit port 450, and a memory 460 for storing data. The video decoding device 400 may further include a photoelectric conversion component and an electro-optical (EO) component coupled to the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, and the outlet port 450 for the outlet or inlet of the optical signal or the electrical signal.
处理器430通过硬件和软件实现。处理器430可以实现为一个或多个CPU芯片、核(例如,多核处理器)、FPGA、ASIC和DSP。处理器430与入口端口410、接收器单元420、发射器单元440、出口端口450和存储器460通信。处理器430包括译码模块470(例如编码模块470或解码模块470)。编码/解码模块470实现本文中所公 开的实施例,以实现本申请实施例所提供的色度块预测方法。例如,编码/解码模块470实现、处理或提供各种编码操作。因此,通过编码/解码模块470为视频译码设备400的功能提供了实质性的改进,并影响了视频译码设备400到不同状态的转换。或者,以存储在存储器460中并由处理器430执行的指令来实现编码/解码模块470。The processor 430 is implemented by hardware and software. The processor 430 may be implemented as one or more CPU chips, cores (eg, multi-core processors), FPGA, ASIC, and DSP. The processor 430 communicates with the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, the outlet port 450, and the memory 460. The processor 430 includes a decoding module 470 (for example, an encoding module 470 or a decoding module 470). The encoding/decoding module 470 implements the embodiments disclosed herein to implement the chroma block prediction method provided by the embodiments of the present application. For example, the encoding/decoding module 470 implements, processes, or provides various encoding operations. Therefore, the encoding/decoding module 470 provides a substantial improvement to the function of the video decoding device 400 and affects the conversion of the video decoding device 400 to different states. Alternatively, the encoding/decoding module 470 is implemented with instructions stored in the memory 460 and executed by the processor 430.
存储器460包括一个或多个磁盘、磁带机和固态硬盘,可以用作溢出数据存储设备,用于在选择性地执行这些程序时存储程序,并存储在程序执行过程中读取的指令和数据。存储器460可以是易失性和/或非易失性的,可以是只读存储器(ROM)、随机存取存储器(RAM)、随机存取存储器(TCAM,Ternary Content-Addressable Memory)和/或静态随机存取存储器(SRAM)。The memory 460 includes one or more magnetic disks, tape drives, and solid-state hard disks, and can be used as an overflow data storage device for storing programs when these programs are selectively executed, as well as instructions and data read during program execution. The memory 460 may be volatile and/or non-volatile, and may be read only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), random access memory (TCAM, Ternary Content-Addressable Memory) and/or static Random Access Memory (SRAM).
参见图5,图5是根据一示例性实施例的可用作图1A中的源设备12和目的地设备14中的任一个或两个的装置500的简化框图。装置500可以实现本申请的技术。换言之,图5为本申请实施例的编码设备或解码设备(简称为译码设备500)的一种实现方式的示意性框图。其中,译码设备500可以包括处理器510、存储器530和总线系统550。其中,处理器和存储器通过总线系统相连,该存储器用于存储指令,该处理器用于执行该存储器存储的指令。译码设备的存储器存储程序代码,且处理器可以调用存储器中存储的程序代码执行本申请描述的各种视频编码或解码方法,尤其是各种新的图像块划分方法。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。Referring to FIG. 5, FIG. 5 is a simplified block diagram of an apparatus 500 that can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1A according to an exemplary embodiment. The device 500 can implement the technology of the present application. In other words, FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of an implementation manner of an encoding device or a decoding device (referred to simply as a decoding device 500) according to an embodiment of the present application. The decoding device 500 may include a processor 510, a memory 530, and a bus system 550. The processor and the memory are connected through a bus system, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory. The memory of the decoding device stores the program code, and the processor can call the program code stored in the memory to perform various video encoding or decoding methods described in this application, especially various new image block division methods. In order to avoid repetition, they are not described in detail here.
在本申请实施例中,该处理器510可以是中央处理单元(CPU,Central Processing Unit),该处理器510还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor 510 may be a central processing unit (CPU, Central Processing Unit), and the processor 510 may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs) , Off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
该存储器530可以包括只读存储器(ROM)设备或者随机存取存储器(RAM)设备。任何其他适宜类型的存储设备也可以用作存储器530。存储器530可以包括由处理器510使用总线550访问的代码和数据531。存储器530可以进一步包括操作系统533和应用程序535,该应用程序535包括允许处理器510执行本申请描述的视频编码或解码方法(尤其是本申请描述的图像块划分方法)的至少一个程序。例如,应用程序535可以包括应用1至N,其进一步包括执行在本申请描述的视频编码或解码方法的视频编码或解码应用(简称视频译码应用)。The memory 530 may include a read only memory (ROM) device or a random access memory (RAM) device. Any other suitable type of storage device may also be used as the memory 530. The memory 530 may include code and data 531 accessed by the processor 510 using the bus 550. The memory 530 may further include an operating system 533 and an application program 535 including at least one program that allows the processor 510 to perform the video encoding or decoding method described in the present application (in particular, the image block division method described in the present application). For example, the application program 535 may include applications 1 to N, which further include a video encoding or decoding application (referred to as a video coding application for short) that performs the video encoding or decoding method described in this application.
该总线系统550除包括数据总线之外,还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见,在图中将各种总线都标为总线系统550。In addition to the data bus, the bus system 550 may also include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clarity, various buses are marked as the bus system 550 in the figure.
可选的,译码设备500还可以包括一个或多个输出设备,诸如显示器570。在一个示例中,显示器570可以是触感显示器,其将显示器与可操作地感测触摸输入的触感单元合并。显示器570可以经由总线550连接到处理器510。Optionally, the decoding device 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as a display 570. In one example, the display 570 may be a tactile display that merges the display with a tactile unit that operably senses touch input. The display 570 may be connected to the processor 510 via the bus 550.
下面详细阐述本申请实施例的方案:The scheme of the embodiment of the present application is explained in detail below:
视频编码标准把一帧图像分割成互不重叠的编码树单元(CTU),一个CTU的大小可设置为64×64(CTU的大小也可设置为其它值,如CTU大小增大为128×128或 256×256等)。64×64的CTU包含由64列、每列64个像素的矩形像素点阵,每个像素包含亮度分量或/和色度分量。接下来,以CTU为单位进一步进行划分,此时,可以使用基于BT的划分方式,如基于水平二叉树(HBT,Horizontal Binary Tree)、竖直二叉树(VBT,Vertical Binary Tree)的划分方式;还可以使用基于四叉树(QT,Quad Tree)的划分方式;还可以使用基于三叉树(TT,Triple-Tree)的划分方式,;还可以使用扩展四叉树(EQT,Extended Quad Tree)的划分方式,如基于水平扩展四叉树(HEQT,Horizontal Extended Quad Tree)、竖直扩展四叉树(VEQT,Vertical Extended Quad Tree)的划分方式。The video coding standard divides a frame of images into non-overlapping coding tree units (CTU). The size of a CTU can be set to 64×64 (the size of the CTU can also be set to other values, such as the CTU size increased to 128×128 Or 256×256, etc.). A 64×64 CTU contains a rectangular pixel lattice of 64 pixels in each column and each pixel contains a luminance component or/and a chrominance component. Next, further divide in CTU units. At this time, you can use BT-based division methods, such as horizontal binary tree (HBT, Horizontal Binary Tree), vertical binary tree (VBT, Vertical Binary Tree) division method; you can also Use the division method based on Quad Tree (QT, Quad); You can also use the division method based on Triple-Tree (TT, Triple-Tree); You can also use the division method of Extended Quad Tree (EQT, Extended Tree) , Such as the division method based on the horizontally expanded quadtree (HEQT, Horizontal Extended Tree), and the vertically expanded quadtree (VEQT, Vertical Extended Tree).
图6为本申请实施例中的BT、QT以及EQT的划分方式的示意图,结合图6所示,下面以解码侧进行图像块划分为例,对上述几种划分方式进行说明。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the BT, QT, and EQT division modes in the embodiment of the present application. With reference to FIG. 6, the following uses the decoding side to divide an image block as an example to describe the foregoing several division modes.
一帧图像可以划分成多个不重叠的CTU。针对一个CTU,可以将CTU作为四叉树的根节点(root),按照四叉树的划分方式,将CTU递归划分成若干个叶节点(leaf node)。一个节点对应于一个图像区域,即图像块,如果节点不再进行划分,则该节点称为叶节点,它所对应的图像区域就形成一个CU;如果节点继续进行划分,则该节点对应的图像区域被划分成如图6(a)所示的四个相同大小的子区域(其宽和高各为被划分区域的一半),每个子区域对应一个子节点,需要分别确定这些子节点是否还会继续划分。一个节点是否划分是由码流中这个节点对应的划分标志位split_cu_flag指示的。根节点的四叉树层级(qtDepth)为0,则子节点的四叉树层级为父节点的四叉树层级加一。为表述简洁,下文中节点的大小和形状即指节点对应的图像区域的大小和形状。A frame of image can be divided into multiple non-overlapping CTUs. For a CTU, the CTU can be used as the root node of the quadtree, and the CTU is recursively divided into several leaf nodes according to the division method of the quadtree. A node corresponds to an image area, that is, an image block. If the node is no longer divided, the node is called a leaf node, and the image area corresponding to it forms a CU; if the node continues to divide, the image corresponding to the node The area is divided into four sub-areas of the same size as shown in Figure 6(a) (its width and height are each half of the divided area), each sub-area corresponds to a sub-node, and it is necessary to determine whether these sub-nodes are Will continue to divide. Whether a node is divided is indicated by the split flag bit split_cu_flag corresponding to this node in the code stream. The quad-tree level (qtDepth) of the root node is 0, and the quad-tree level of the child node is the quad-tree level of the parent node plus one. For simplicity, the size and shape of the node in the following refers to the size and shape of the image area corresponding to the node.
更具体的,对64×64的CTU节点(四叉树层级为0),根据它对应的split_cu_flag,可选择不划分,成为1个64×64的CU,或者选择划分为4个32×32的节点(四叉树层级为1)。这四个32×32的节点中的每一个节点,又可以根据它对应的split_cu_flag,选择继续划分或者不划分;如果一个32×32的节点继续划分,则产生四个16×16的节点(四叉树层级为2)。以此类推,直到所有节点都不再划分,这样一个CTU就被划分成一组CU。CU的最小尺寸(size)在SPS中标识,例如8×8为最小CU。在上述递归划分过程中,如果一个节点的尺寸等于最小CU边长(minCUSize),这个节点默认为不再划分,同时也不需要在码流中包含它的split_cu_flag。More specifically, for a 64×64 CTU node (the quadtree level is 0), according to its corresponding split_cu_flag, you can choose not to divide into 1 64×64 CU, or choose to divide into 4 32×32 Node (quadtree level is 1). Each of the four 32×32 nodes can choose to continue or not to divide according to its corresponding split_cu_flag; if a 32×32 node continues to divide, four 16×16 nodes (four The fork tree level is 2). By analogy, until all nodes are no longer divided, such a CTU is divided into a group of CU. The minimum size of the CU is identified in the SPS, for example, 8×8 is the smallest CU. In the above recursive division process, if the size of a node is equal to the minimum CU side length (minCUSize), this node defaults to no division, and it does not need to include its split_cu_flag in the code stream.
在最新的AVS3的制定过程中,AVS3在QT划分的基础上,增加了BT划分方式和EQT划分方式。In the process of formulating the latest AVS3, AVS3 added BT division and EQT division on the basis of QT division.
其中,BT划分方式是将一个节点划分成2个子节点,具体的BT划分方式有两种:1)HBT:将节点对应的区域划分成上、下两个相同大小的子区域(即宽不变,高变为划分前区域的一半),每个子区域对应于一个子节点;如图6(b)所示;2)VBT:将节点对应的区域划分成左、右两个相同大小的区域(即高不变,宽变为划分前区域的一半),如图6(c)所示。Among them, the BT division method is to divide a node into two sub-nodes. There are two specific BT division methods: 1) HBT: divide the area corresponding to the node into two sub-areas of the same size (that is, the width is unchanged) , The height becomes half of the area before division), each sub-area corresponds to a child node; as shown in Figure 6(b); 2) VBT: divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size on the left and right ( That is, the height remains unchanged, and the width becomes half of the area before division), as shown in Fig. 6(c).
EQT划分方式是将一个节点划分成4个子节点,具体的EQT划分方式有两种:The EQT division method is to divide a node into 4 child nodes. There are two specific EQT division methods:
1)HEQT:将节点对应的区域划分成上、中、下三个子区域,并将中间的子区域水平划分为中左和中右两个子区域,每个子区域对应于一个子节点,其中上、中左、中 右、下四个子区域的高分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/2、1/4,中左和中右宽度为节点高度的1/2、1/2,如图6(d)所示;2)VEQT:将节点对应的区域划分成左、中、右三个区域,并将中间的子区域再竖直划分为中上和中下两个子区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,其中左、中上、中下、右四个子区域的宽分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/2、1/4,中上和中下宽度为节点高度的1/2、1/2,如图6(e)所示。1) HEQT: the area corresponding to the node is divided into three sub-areas of upper, middle and lower, and the middle sub-area is divided into two sub-areas of middle left and right, each sub-area corresponds to a sub-node, among which The heights of the center left, center right, and bottom four subregions are 1/4, 1/2, 1/2, 1/4 of the node height, and the width of the center left and center right are 1/2, 1/2 of the node height , As shown in Fig. 6(d); 2) VEQT: divide the area corresponding to the node into three areas of left, center and right, and vertically divide the middle sub-area into two sub-areas of upper middle and lower middle, Each area corresponds to a node, where the widths of the four sub-areas of left, middle upper, middle lower, and right are 1/4, 1/2, 1/2, 1/4 of the node height, and the width of the middle upper and lower middle It is 1/2 and 1/2 of the node height, as shown in Figure 6(e).
在AVS3中还使用了QT级联BT/EQT的划分方式,即第一级编码树上的节点只能使用QT划分成子节点,第一级编码树的叶节点为第二级编码树的根节点;第二级编码树上的节点可使用BT或EQT划分方式中的一种划分为子节点;第二级编码树的叶节点为编码单元。需要注意的是,当叶节点为BT或EQT划分方式时,其叶节点只能使用BT或EQT划分方式,而不能使用QT的方式。In AVS3, QT concatenated BT/EQT is also used, that is, the nodes on the first-level coding tree can only be divided into child nodes using QT, and the leaf nodes of the first-level coding tree are the root nodes of the second-level coding tree The nodes on the second-level coding tree can be divided into child nodes using one of the BT or EQT division methods; the leaf nodes of the second-level coding tree are coding units. It should be noted that when a leaf node is divided into BT or EQT, its leaf nodes can only use BT or EQT, but not QT.
多用途视频编码测试模型(VTM,Versatile video coding Test Model)参考软件在QT划分的基础上,增加了BT划分方式和TT划分方式。其中,VTM是JVET组织开发的新式编解码器参考软件。The multi-purpose video coding test model (VTM, Versatile Video Coding Test Model) reference software adds BT division method and TT division method on the basis of QT division. Among them, VTM is a new codec reference software developed by JVET.
TT划分方式是将一个节点划分成3个子节点,具体的TT划分方式有两种:1)水平TT(HTT,Horizontal TT):将节点对应的区域划分成上、中、下三个子区域,每个子区域对应于一个子节点,其中上、中、下三个区域的高分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4;2)竖直TT(VTT,Vertical TT):将节点对应的区域划分成左、中、右三个子区域,每个子区域对应于一个子节点,其中左、中、右三个区域的宽分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4。The TT division method is to divide a node into three sub-nodes. There are two specific TT division methods: 1) Horizontal TT (HTT, Horizontal TT): the area corresponding to the node is divided into three sub-areas of upper, middle and lower, each Each sub-region corresponds to a sub-node, where the heights of the upper, middle, and lower regions are 1/4, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height; 2) Vertical TT (VTT, Vertical TT): the node The corresponding area is divided into three sub-regions: left, center, and right. Each sub-region corresponds to a child node. The widths of the left, center, and right regions are 1/4, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height. .
VTM中使用了QT级联BT/TT的划分方式,简称为QT-MTT(Quad Tree plus Multi-Type Tree)划分方式。更具体的,CTU通过QT划分,产生QT子节点,QT中的子节点可使用QT划分继续划分成四个QT子节点,或者不再划分产生一个QT叶节点。然后,以QT叶节点作为MTT的根节点,使用HBT、VBT、HTT、VTT这四种划分方式中的一种划分为子节点,或者不再划分成为一个MTT叶节点。MTT的叶节点对应一个CU。VTM uses the division method of QT cascaded BT/TT, referred to as QT-MTT (Quad Tree Plus plus Multi-Type Tree) division method. More specifically, the CTU generates QT child nodes through QT division. The child nodes in QT can be further divided into four QT child nodes using QT division, or no longer generate a QT leaf node. Then, the QT leaf node is used as the root node of the MTT, and one of the four division methods of HBT, VBT, HTT, and VTT is used to divide into child nodes, or no longer divided into an MTT leaf node. The leaf node of MTT corresponds to a CU.
举例来说,图7为本申请实施例中的基于QT-MTT的划分方式的示意图,如图7所示,在图7的右图中每个端点表示一个节点,一个节点连出4根线表示QT划分,一个节点连出2根线表示BT划分,一个节点连出3根线表示TT划分。其中,实线表示QT划分,虚线表示多类型划分(MTT,Multi-Type Tree)的第一层划分,点划线表示MTT的第二层划分。a到p为16个MTT叶节点,每个MTT叶节点对应于一个CU。一个CTU按照图7右图的划分方式,得到了如图7左图所示的CU划分图,一个CTU基于QT-MTT的划分方式划分成a到p等16个CU。For example, FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a division method based on QT-MTT in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7, each endpoint in the right diagram of FIG. 7 represents a node, and a node is connected with 4 lines Indicates QT division, 2 lines connected to one node represent BT division, and 3 lines connected to one node represent TT division. Among them, the solid line represents the QT division, the dashed line represents the first layer division of the multi-type division (MTT, Multi-Type Tree), and the dot-and-dash line represents the second layer division of the MTT. a to p are 16 MTT leaf nodes, and each MTT leaf node corresponds to a CU. A CTU is divided into 16 CUs such as a to p based on the QT-MTT division method according to the division method of the right diagram in FIG. 7 to obtain the CU division diagram shown in the left diagram of FIG. 7.
在QT-MTT划分方式中,每个CU具有QT层级(QT depth),也称为QT深度,和MTT层级(MTT depth),也称为MTT深度。QT层级表示CU所属的QT叶节点的QT层级,MTT层级表示CU所属MTT叶节点的MTT层级。编码树的根节点的QT层级为0,MTT层级为0。如果编码树上一个节点使用QT划分,则划分得到的子节点的QT层级为该节点的QT层级加1,MTT层级不变;相似的,如果编码树上一个节点使用MTT划分(即BT或TT划分之一),则划分得到的子节点的MTT层级为该节点的MTT层级加1,QT层级不变。例如图7中a、b、c、d、e、f、g、i、j的QT层级为1,MTT层级 为2;h的QT层级为1,MTT层级为1;n、o、p的QT层级为2,MTT层级为0;l、m的QT层级为2,MTTT层级为1。如果CTU只划分成一个CU,则此CU的QT层级为0,MTT层级为0。In the QT-MTT division method, each CU has a QT depth (QT depth), also called QT depth, and an MTT depth (MTT depth), also called MTT depth. The QT level represents the QT level of the QT leaf node to which the CU belongs, and the MTT level represents the MTT level of the MTT leaf node to which the CU belongs. The QT level of the root node of the coding tree is 0, and the MTT level is 0. If a node on the coding tree uses QT division, the QT level of the divided child node is the QT level of the node plus 1, the MTT level remains unchanged; similarly, if a node on the coding tree uses MTT division (ie BT or TT One of the divisions), the MTT level of the child node obtained by the division is the MTT level of the node plus 1, and the QT level remains unchanged. For example, in Figure 7, the QT level of a, b, c, d, e, f, g, i, j is 1, and the MTT level is 2; the QT level of h is 1, and the MTT level is 1; n, o, p The QT level is 2, and the MTT level is 0; the QT level of l and m is 2, and the MTTT level is 1. If the CTU is divided into only one CU, the QT level of this CU is 0 and the MTT level is 0.
需要说明的是,上述由多种划分方式所生成的编码树上,一个节点对应一个图像块,一个叶子节点对应的图像块为CU。It should be noted that, in the above coding tree generated by multiple division methods, one node corresponds to one image block, and the image block corresponding to one leaf node is CU.
在视频序列进行编码的过程中划分图像块时,若要确定一个图像块的划分方式,需要先计算上述划分方式中每一种划分方式所对应的率失真代价,比较各个率失真代价后确定该图像块的最优划分方式;而在视频序列进行解码的过程中划分图像块时,则需要不断从码流中解析各个图像块的划分方式,按照解析出的划分方式划分的图像块才能够正确解码。可见,视频序列编解码的计算复杂度过高。When dividing an image block during the encoding of a video sequence, to determine the division method of an image block, it is necessary to first calculate the rate-distortion cost corresponding to each of the above-mentioned division methods, and compare the rate-distortion costs to determine the The optimal division method of image blocks; when dividing the image blocks during the decoding of the video sequence, it is necessary to continuously analyze the division method of each image block from the code stream, and the image blocks divided according to the resolved division method can be correct decoding. It can be seen that the computational complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding is too high.
为了解决上述问题,本申请实施例提供了一种图像块划分方法,该方法可以应用于编码器的编码过程,也可以应用于解码器的解码过程。In order to solve the above problems, the embodiments of the present application provide an image block division method, which can be applied to the encoding process of the encoder or the decoding process of the decoder.
本申请实施例一:Example one of this application:
图8为本申请实施例中的图像块划分方法的实施流程示意图,如图8所示,该图像块划分方法,包括:。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation process of an image block division method in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8, the image block division method includes:.
S801:获取当前图像中当前图像块的块信息;S801: Obtain the block information of the current image block in the current image;
在实际应用中,上述当前图像块为当前图像划分出的一个图像块,对应于当前图像的编码树上的一个节点,当前图像块可以为当前图像的一个CTU,也可以为以CTU为根节点划分得到的子块,还可以为以一个层级的子块为根节点划分得到的下一层级的子块。In practical applications, the above-mentioned current image block is an image block divided by the current image, corresponding to a node on the coding tree of the current image. The current image block may be a CTU of the current image, or may be a CTU as the root node The sub-block obtained by division may also be a sub-block of the next level obtained by dividing a sub-block of one level as a root node.
上述当前图像块的块信息可以包括当前图像块的尺寸信息,如当前图像块的宽、高,还可以包括当前图像块中像素点的坐标,这里,像素点的坐标是相对于当前图像左上顶点的像素位置的坐标,当然,块信息还可以为其让他当前图像块对应的图像相关信息,这些块信息能够从当前图像,如当前图像在进行图像块划分的过程中,由当前图像的尺寸信息推导获得的,或者从码流中解析得到。The block information of the current image block may include the size information of the current image block, such as the width and height of the current image block, and may also include the coordinates of the pixels in the current image block. Here, the coordinates of the pixels are relative to the upper left vertex of the current image. Of course, the block information can be the image-related information corresponding to the current image block. These block information can be derived from the current image, such as the current image during the process of image block division, by the size of the current image. The information is derived from, or parsed from the code stream.
那么,如果是解码端实施S801的话,在解码端在接收到来自编码端的码流后,解析码流,能够从中获得对应的当前图像块的块信息。而如果是编码端实施S801的话,则编码端可以从当前图像的图像信息中获得当前图像块的块信息,例如,根据当前图像中的像素点坐标,获得当前图像块中的像素点的坐标,进而计算得到当前图像块的宽和/或高。Then, if the decoding end implements S801, after receiving the code stream from the encoding end, the decoding end parses the code stream to obtain the block information of the corresponding current image block therefrom. If the encoding end implements S801, the encoding end may obtain the block information of the current image block from the image information of the current image, for example, the coordinates of the pixel points in the current image block according to the coordinates of the pixel points in the current image, Then, the width and/or height of the current image block are calculated.
上述当前图像的边界可以包括却不限于:当前图像的右边界和/或下边界。The boundary of the current image may include but is not limited to: the right boundary and/or the lower boundary of the current image.
S802:根据块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界;S802: According to the block information, determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image;
首先,需要说明的是,上述当前图像块超出当前图像的边界并不是指当前图像块中超出图像边界的范围内还有像素值,而是指当前图像块中沿某一个方向或者两个方向的最大坐标值超出了图像边界沿着相同方向的坐标值。First, it should be noted that the above-mentioned current image block beyond the current image boundary does not mean that there are still pixel values in the current image block beyond the image boundary, but it refers to the current image block in a certain direction or two directions The maximum coordinate value exceeds the coordinate value of the image boundary along the same direction.
图9为本申请实施例中的当前图像块超出当前图像边界的示意图,如图9所示,虚线表示的是当前图像块超出当前图像的边界可能出现的情形,其中,横轴正方向向右,纵轴正方向向下,当前图像块91表示超出当前图像90的右边界的图像块,当前图像块92表示超出当前图像90的下边界的图像块,当前图像块93表示超出当前图 像90的右下边界的图像块(即当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界和下边界)。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the current image block exceeding the current image boundary in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9, the dotted line indicates that the current image block may exceed the boundary of the current image, where the positive direction of the horizontal axis is to the right , The positive direction of the vertical axis is downward, the current image block 91 represents the image block beyond the right boundary of the current image 90, the current image block 92 represents the image block beyond the lower boundary of the current image 90, and the current image block 93 represents the image block beyond the current image 90 The image block at the lower right boundary (that is, the current image block exceeds the right and lower boundaries of the current image).
在一些可能的实施方式下,解码侧可以根据获得块信息,如当前图像块中像素点的坐标,来判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界。那么,S802可以包括:根据块信息,获得当前图像块中的一个像素点的坐标(x,y);判断像素点的坐标(x,y)是否满足预设条件,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第一预设条件,则表明像素超出当前图像的右边界,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第二预设条件,则表明像素超出当前图像的下边界,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第三预设条件,则表明像素点超出当前图像的右边界且超出当前图像的下边界。In some possible implementation manners, the decoding side may determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image according to the obtained block information, such as the coordinates of pixels in the current image block. Then, S802 may include: obtaining the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block according to the block information; determining whether the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy the preset condition, if the coordinates of the pixel (x , Y) meets the first preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the second preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the pixel The coordinates (x, y) satisfy the third preset condition, which indicates that the pixel point exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
这里,上述像素点是用来表示当前图像块的,可以选取当前图像块中特定的像素点来表示当前图像块,如选取当前图像块的各个顶点的像素点,如左上顶点的像素点、右上顶点的像素点、左下顶点的像素点或者右下顶点的像素点,当然,还可以选取当前图像块的中心位置的像素点。通过这些像素点的坐标与当前图像的边界的坐标之间的比较,就能够判断出当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界。为了进一步提高准确度,还可以选取当前图像块中的任意一个像素点,并以该以此来判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界。Here, the above pixel points are used to represent the current image block, and specific pixel points in the current image block can be selected to represent the current image block, such as the pixel points of each vertex of the current image block, such as the pixel point of the upper left vertex, the upper right The pixel point of the vertex, the pixel point of the lower left vertex or the pixel point of the lower right vertex, of course, you can also select the pixel point of the center position of the current image block. By comparing the coordinates of these pixel points with the coordinates of the boundary of the current image, it can be determined whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image. In order to further improve the accuracy, any pixel in the current image block can also be selected and used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image.
举例来说,上述像素点的坐标(x,y)为当前图像块中的左上顶点的像素点相对于当前图像左上顶点像素位置的坐标;相应地,上述第一预设条件可以为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH≤picH;上述第二预设条件可以为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW≤picW,且y+cH>picH;上述第三预设条件可以为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH>picH;其中,cW为当前图像块的宽,cH为当前图像块的高,picW为当前图像的宽,picH为当前图像的高。For example, the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel points are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image; accordingly, the first preset condition may be: a pixel The coordinates (x, y) satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH≤picH; the above second preset condition may be: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW≤picW, and y+cH >picH; the above third preset condition may be: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH; where cW is the width of the current image block and cH is the current image block Height, picW is the width of the current image, picH is the height of the current image.
可见,在S801之后,判断当前图像块的宽和高是否满足上述第一预设条件、第二预设条件和第三预设条件,若满足上述三个条件中的任意一个,即可以确认当前图像块超出当前图像的边界,并且根据块信息所满足的预设条件来确定当前图像块具体超出的是当前图像的右边界,还是下边界,或者同时超出右边界和下边界。It can be seen that after S801, it is determined whether the width and height of the current image block satisfy the first preset condition, the second preset condition, and the third preset condition. If any of the above three conditions are met, the current status can be confirmed. The image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, and it is determined according to the preset conditions satisfied by the block information whether the current image block specifically exceeds the right boundary or the lower boundary of the current image, or both the right boundary and the lower boundary.
当然,还可以采用其他条件来判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界,对此本申请实施例不作具体限定。Of course, other conditions may also be used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
S803:若当前图像块超出当前图像的边界,则为当前图像块确定强制划分方式;S803: If the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, determine the mandatory division method for the current image block;
这里,在判断出当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界和/或下边界后,根据当前图像块具体超出的情况,为其确定强制划分方式。其中,强制划分方式是指当前图像块的划分方式无需通过解析码流得到,且当前图像块直接使用该强制划分方式进行划分。Here, after judging that the current image block exceeds the right boundary and/or the lower boundary of the current image, the forced division method is determined for the current image block according to the specific exceeding situation. The forced division method refers to that the division method of the current image block does not need to be obtained by parsing the code stream, and the current image block is directly divided using the forced division method.
在一些可能的实施方式下,当S802判断出当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界或下边界时,S803可以包括:将当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,也就是说,将当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,并根据比较结果,为当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式。In some possible implementation manners, when S802 determines that the current image block exceeds the right or lower boundary of the current image, S803 may include: comparing the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold to determine a correspondence for the current image block The forced division mode of the image, that is, the size information of the current image block is compared with a preset threshold, and the corresponding forced division mode is determined for the current image block according to the comparison result.
在本申请实施例中,上述预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置,也可以解码端从码流中高层语法元素(例如,序列参数集合(SPS,Sequence Parameter Set)、图像参数集(PPS,Picture Parameter Set)或条带头(slice  header))解析得到。预设阈值的取值可以根据实际需求的不同而不同,本申请实施例不做具体限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the above-mentioned preset threshold may be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or a high-level syntax element (eg, sequence parameter set (SPS, Sequence Parameter Set), image) in the code stream from the decoding end The parameter set (PPS, Picture, Set) or slice header (parse header) is obtained by parsing. The value of the preset threshold may be different according to actual needs, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit it.
举例来说,当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界或下边界时,S803可以且不限于按照以下方法实施:For example, when the current image block exceeds the right or lower boundary of the current image, S803 may and is not limited to be implemented according to the following method:
方法一:method one:
当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时,若当前图像块的宽等于阈值K(即第一预设阈值),且当前图像块的高大于阈值K,则可以确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为HBT的划分方式;否则,若当前图像块的宽不等于阈值K,且当前图像块的高小于或者等于阈值K,则可以确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为VBT的划分方式。此时,阈值K为正整数;When the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold K (that is, the first preset threshold), and the height of the current image block is greater than the threshold K, it can be determined that the current image block is forced to comply with HBT The division method is divided, that is to say, the mandatory division method of the current image block is the HBT division method; otherwise, if the width of the current image block is not equal to the threshold K, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the threshold K, you can determine the current The image blocks are forcibly divided according to the VBT division mode, that is to say, the forced division mode of the current image block is determined as the VBT division mode. At this time, the threshold K is a positive integer;
当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时,若当前图像块的宽大于阈值K,且当前图像块的高等于阈值K,则可以确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为VBT的划分方式;否则,若当前图像块的宽小于或者等于阈值K,且当前图像块的高不等于阈值K,则可以确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为HBT的划分方式。When the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is greater than the threshold K, and the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold K, it can be determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, that is to say determined The forced division method of the current image block is the division method of VBT; otherwise, if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the threshold K, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the threshold K, it can be determined that the current image block is forcedly divided according to HBT Division, that is to say, the forced division mode of the current image block is the division mode of HBT.
其中,上述阈值K(即第一预设阈值)可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置(如设置为64),也可以由视频解码器从码流中高层语法元素(例如,SPS、PPS或slice header)中解析得到。The above threshold K (that is, the first preset threshold) can be set in the video encoder or video decoder (for example, set to 64), or the video decoder can extract high-level syntax elements (for example, SPS, PPS or slice header).
方法二:Method Two:
当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时,若当前图像块的宽等于阈值M(即第二预设阈值),且当前图像块的高等于阈值L(即第三预设阈值),则可以确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为HBT的划分方式;否则,若当前图像块的宽不等于阈值M,且当前图像块的高不等于阈值L,则可以确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为VBT的划分方式;这里,阈值M小于阈值L。When the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold M (ie, the second preset threshold), and the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold L (ie, the third preset threshold), then It is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, that is to say, the forced division method of the current image block is the HBT division method; otherwise, if the width of the current image block is not equal to the threshold M and the height of the current image block is not equal to Threshold L, it can be determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division mode, that is to say, the forced division mode of the current image block is the VBT division mode; here, the threshold M is smaller than the threshold L.
当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时,若当前图像块的高等于阈值M,且当前图像块的宽等于阈值L,则可以确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为VBT的划分方式;否则,若当前图像块的高不等于阈值M,且当前图像块的宽不等于阈值L,则可以确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为HBT的划分方式。When the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold M and the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold L, it can be determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, that is to say determined The forced division of the current image block is the division of VBT; otherwise, if the height of the current image block is not equal to the threshold M and the width of the current image block is not equal to the threshold L, it can be determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method That is to say, the forced division method of the current image block is determined as the HBT division method.
其中,阈值M和阈值L均可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置,也可以由解码端从码流中高层语法元素(例如,SPS、PPS或slice header)解析得到。在本申请实施例中,阈值M可以为大于或者等于32的整数,例如,阈值M为64,阈值L为128;也可以阈值M为32,阈值L为128。当然,阈值M和阈值L的取值还可以有其他的情况,只要能够满足阈值M小于阈值L这一条件即可,本申请实施例不作具体限定。Both the threshold M and the threshold L can be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or can be parsed by the decoding end from high-level syntax elements (for example, SPS, PPS, or slice header) in the code stream. In the embodiment of the present application, the threshold M may be an integer greater than or equal to 32, for example, the threshold M is 64 and the threshold L is 128; the threshold M may be 32 and the threshold L is 128. Of course, the values of the threshold value M and the threshold value L may have other situations, as long as the condition that the threshold value M is smaller than the threshold value L can be satisfied, and the embodiments of the present application are not specifically limited.
在本申请实施例中,除了上述当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界或者下边界的情 况外,当当前图像块既超出当前图像的右边界又超出当前图像的下边界时,可以确定当前图像块强制按照QT的划分方式划分,也就是说确定当前图像块的强制划分方式为QT的划分方式。In the embodiment of the present application, except for the case where the current image block exceeds the right or lower boundary of the current image, when the current image block exceeds both the right boundary of the current image and the lower boundary of the current image, the current image block can be determined It is forcibly divided according to the QT division mode, that is to say, the forced division mode of the current image block is determined as the QT division mode.
在具体实施过程中,上述当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界和/或下边界时,还可以采用其他方式来为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,本领域技术人员可自行设定,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。In the specific implementation process, when the current image block exceeds the right border and/or the lower border of the current image, other methods may also be used to determine the mandatory division method for the current image block, which can be set by those skilled in the art. The embodiment does not specifically limit this.
上述阈值K、阈值M和阈值L的取值可以根据实际图像划分的需求进行设置,并不仅限于上述举例。The values of the threshold K, the threshold M and the threshold L can be set according to the needs of actual image division, and are not limited to the above examples.
上述为当前图像块确定的强制划分方式可以且不限为HBT、VBT、QT、HEQT以及VEQT这几种划分方式中的一种或者多种的级联,其中,HBT和VBT属于BT划分方式中的具体应用,HEQT和VEQT属于EQT的划分方式中的具体应用。例如,在AVS3标准中,使用了QT级联BT/EQT的划分方式,即第一级编码树上的节点只能使用QT划分成子节点,第一级编码树的子节点为第二级编码树的根节点;第二级编码树上的根节点可使用BT或EQT划分方式中的一种划分为子节点。需要注意的是,当子节点使用BT或EQT划分方式时,其子节点只能使用BT或EQT划分方式,而不能使用QT的划分方式。The above-mentioned mandatory division method for the current image block can be and is not limited to one or more of the cascade of HBT, VBT, QT, HEQT and VEQT. Among them, HBT and VBT belong to the BT division method Specific application, HEQT and VEQT belong to the specific application of EQT division. For example, in the AVS3 standard, QT concatenated BT/EQT is used, that is, the nodes on the first level coding tree can only be divided into child nodes using QT, and the child nodes of the first level coding tree are the second level coding tree The root node of the second level coding tree can be divided into child nodes using one of the BT or EQT division methods. It should be noted that when a child node uses BT or EQT division, its child nodes can only use BT or EQT division, but not QT division.
S804:按照强制划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。S804: Divide the current image block according to the forced division method.
这里,在通过S803确定当前图像块的强制划分方式后,根据确定出的强制划分方式对当前图像块进行强制划分,得到多个子块。Here, after the forced division mode of the current image block is determined through S803, the current image block is forcedly divided according to the determined forced division mode to obtain multiple sub-blocks.
接下来,解码端可以针对这些子块中的每一个子块执行S801至S804,以此类推,直至所有的子块均无法继续划分,此时解码端可以得到上述当前图像块下的叶子节点,这些叶子节点对应的图像区域即为CU。然后,解码端从码流中解析获取每个CU对应的语法元素,获得每个CU和各子区域的预测信息和残差信息,可根据各子区域相应的预测信息对各子区域执行帧间预测处理或帧内预测处理,得到各子区域的帧间预测块或帧内预测块。再根据各子区域的残差信息,将变换系数经过反量化和反变换处理得到残差块,并叠加到对应子区域的预测块上,产生重建块,也就是重建当前图像块。Next, the decoding end can perform S801 to S804 for each of these sub-blocks, and so on, until all the sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time, the decoding end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, The image area corresponding to these leaf nodes is the CU. Then, the decoding end parses and obtains the syntax elements corresponding to each CU from the code stream, obtains the prediction information and residual information of each CU and each sub-region, and can perform inter-frame on each sub-region according to the corresponding prediction information of each sub-region The prediction process or the intra prediction process obtains the inter prediction block or the intra prediction block of each sub-region. According to the residual information of each sub-region, the transform coefficients are subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing to obtain a residual block, which is superimposed on the prediction block of the corresponding sub-region to generate a reconstructed block, that is, to reconstruct the current image block.
在一些可能的实施方式下,在编码端执行完成S804后,也可以针对这些子块中的每一个子块执行S801至S804,以此类推,直至所有的子块均无法继续划分,此时编码端可以得到上述当前图像块下的叶子节点,这些叶子节点对应的图像区域即为CU。然后,编码端对每一个CU进行预测处理,获得对应的预测块,然后在根据当前图像块和预测块,获得对应的残差块,进而对残差块进行熵编码,生成对应的码流,实现对当前图像块的编码。In some possible implementation manners, after completing S804 at the encoding end, S801 to S804 may also be performed for each of these sub-blocks, and so on, until all sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time encoding The end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, and the image area corresponding to these leaf nodes is the CU. Then, the encoding end performs prediction processing on each CU to obtain the corresponding prediction block, and then obtains the corresponding residual block according to the current image block and the prediction block, and then entropy encodes the residual block to generate the corresponding code stream. To encode the current image block.
在本实施例中,当当前图像块超出当前图像的边界时,对当前图像块进行编解码的情况较为复杂,所以,为了降低编解码的计算复杂度,对超出当前图像的边界的图像块采取上述若通过S801至S804所述的图像块划分方法;而对于未超出当前图像的边界的图像块,则可以从当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式,并按照最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分;或者,从码流中解析获得当前图像块的语法元素,并按照当前图像块对应的语法元素所指示的划分方式当前图像块进行划分。 当然,也可以实施下述实施例中的划分方式,以进一步降低视频序列编解码的计算复杂度,提升压缩性能,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。In this embodiment, when the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, it is more complicated to encode and decode the current image block. Therefore, in order to reduce the calculation complexity of the encoding and decoding, the image blocks beyond the boundary of the current image are taken If the above image block division methods described in S801 to S804 are used; and for image blocks that do not exceed the boundary of the current image, the final division method can be determined from the division methods allowed for the current image block, and the final division method The current image block is divided; or, the syntax element of the current image block is obtained by parsing from the code stream, and the current image block is divided according to the division manner indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block. Of course, the division method in the following embodiments may also be implemented to further reduce the calculation complexity of the video sequence codec and improve the compression performance, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在一些可能的实施方式下,解码端可以通过解析码流从当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式,例如,解码端可以确定当前图像块允许使用的划分方式的,然后,根据这些当前图像块允许使用的划分方式,依次确定划分信息二值化的各个bin(即split_cu_flag、bt_split_flag、bqt_split_type_flag和bqt_split_dir_flag,或者顺序是split_cu_flag、bt_split_flag、bqt_split_dir_flag和bqt_split_type_flag)是否从码流中解析,并根据解析得到的划分信息二值化的bin,确定当前图像块的最终划分方式。In some possible implementation manners, the decoding end may determine the final division method from the division methods allowed by the current image block by parsing the code stream. For example, the decoding end may determine the division methods allowed by the current image block, and then, according to These current image blocks are allowed to be divided into two bins (ie split_cu_flag, bt_split_flag, bqt_split_type_flag and bqt_split_dir_flag, or the sequence is split_cu_flag, bt_split_flag, bqt_split_split_flag and bqt according to the code and bqt). Analyze the binarized bin of the divided information to determine the final division method of the current image block.
其中,split_cu_flag为1,则表示当前图像块允许使用QT划分,split_cu_flag为0,则表示当前图像块不允许使用QT划分;bt_split_flag为1,则表示当前图像块允许使用EQT或BT划分,bt_split_flag为0,则表示当前图像块不允许使用EQT和BT划分;bqt_split_type_flag为1,则表示当前图像块允许使用BT划分,bqt_split_type_flag为0,则表示当前图像块允许使用EQT划分;bqt_split_dir_flag为1,则表示当前图像块允许使用竖直划分,bqt_split_dir_flag为0,则表示当前图像块允许使用水平划分。Among them, split_cu_flag is 1, it means that the current image block is allowed to use QT division, split_cu_flag is 0, it means that the current image block is not allowed to use QT division; bt_split_flag is 1, it means that the current image block is allowed to use EQT or BT division, bt_split_flag is 0 , It means that the current image block is not allowed to use EQT and BT division; bqt_split_type_flag is 1, it means that the current image block is allowed to use BT division, bqt_split_type_flag is 0, it means that the current image block is allowed to use EQT division; bqt_split_dir_flag is 1, it means the current image Blocks are allowed to use vertical division, bqt_split_dir_flag is 0, it means that the current image block is allowed to use horizontal division.
如果当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中不包含QT划分,则解码端无需从码流中解析split_cu_flag;否则,解码端从码流中解析split_cu_flag;如果split_cu_flag为1,则表明当前图像块允许使用QT划分,此时,确定QT为当前图像块的最终划分方式;如果split_cu_flag为0,则解码端继续解析bt_split_flag,如果bt_split_flag为0,则表情当前图像块不允许使用EQT和BT划分,则不需要继续解析bqt_split_type_flag和bqt_split_dir_flag,直接确定当前图像块不划分;如果bt_split_flag为1,则表明当前图像块允许使用EQT或者BT划分,此时,还需要进一步确定当前图像块最终使用的是HEQT、VEQT、HBT和VBT中的哪一种划分方式。这里,如果当前图像块的这4种划分均允许使用,则解码端从码流中依次解析bqt_split_type_flag和bqt_split_dir_flag(解析顺序可以是先解析bqt_split_type_flag,再解析bqt_split_dir_flag;也可以是先解析bqt_split_dir_flag,再解析bqt_split_type_flag);如果当前图像块允许使用上述四种划分方式中的一至三种,则当前图像块的bqt_split_dir_flag和/或bqt_split_type_flag是无需从码流中解析的,而是可以直接导出。由此,便能确定当前图像块的最终划方式,并按照该最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。If the current image block does not include QT division, the decoder does not need to parse split_cu_flag from the code stream; otherwise, the decoder parses split_cu_flag from the code stream; if split_cu_flag is 1, it means that the current image block allows QT Division, at this time, determine QT as the final division of the current image block; if split_cu_flag is 0, the decoder continues to parse bt_split_flag, if bt_split_flag is 0, the expression of the current image block is not allowed to use EQT and BT division, you do not need to continue Analyze bqt_split_type_flag and bqt_split_dir_flag to directly determine that the current image block is not divided; if bt_split_flag is 1, it indicates that the current image block allows EQT or BT division. At this time, it is necessary to further determine that the current image block uses HEQT, VEQT, HBT and Which way to divide in VBT. Here, if the four divisions of the current image block are allowed to be used, the decoding end parses bqt_split_type_flag and bqt_split_dir_flag from the code stream in sequence (the parsing order can be parsing bqt_split_type_flag, then parsing bqt_split_dir_flag; parsing bqt_split_blit_qg, parsing ); If the current image block allows to use one to three of the above four divisions, the bqt_split_dir_flag and/or bqt_split_type_flag of the current image block need not be parsed from the code stream, but can be directly exported. Thus, the final division method of the current image block can be determined, and the current image block can be divided according to the final division method.
而对于编码端来说,则可以一一计算当前图像块允许使用的划分方式对应的率失真代价,再根据率失真代价选择当前图像块的最终划分方式,并按照该最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。For the encoding end, you can calculate the rate-distortion cost corresponding to the allowed division method of the current image block, and then select the final division method of the current image block according to the rate-distortion cost, and then the current image block according to the final division method To divide.
在本申请实施例中,在当前图像中,按照之字形(Zigzag)进行扫描的过程中,当扫描到当前图像中的一个图像块,即当前图像块时,从码流中解析得到当前图像块的块信息,然后,根据这些块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界,并为超出当前图像的边界的当前图像块确定强制划分方式,并按此方式进行强制划分,避免编码端为确定当前图像块的最优的划分方式而多次计算率失真代价,也无需不断从 码流中解析当前图像块的划分方式,从而降低视频序列编解码的计算复杂度,提升压缩性能。In the embodiment of the present application, in the current image, when scanning according to the zigzag (Zigzag), when an image block in the current image is scanned, that is, the current image block, the current image block is parsed from the code stream Block information, and then, based on these block information, determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, and determine the forced division method for the current image block that exceeds the boundary of the current image, and perform the forced division in this way to avoid the encoding end being To determine the optimal division method of the current image block and calculate the rate-distortion cost multiple times, there is no need to continuously analyze the division method of the current image block from the code stream, thereby reducing the calculation complexity of the video sequence encoding and decoding and improving the compression performance.
本申请实施例二:Embodiment 2 of this application:
在前述实施例的基础上,在一些可能的实施方式下,为了进一步降低视频序列编解码的计算复杂度,提升压缩性能,在通过S802判断出当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界之后,仍参见图8中虚线所示,上述方法还包括:Based on the foregoing embodiments, in some possible implementation manners, in order to further reduce the computational complexity of the video sequence codec and improve the compression performance, after determining that the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image through S802, please refer to As shown by the dotted line in FIG. 8, the above method further includes:
S805:若当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界,则至少根据当前图像块的尺寸信息为当前图像块确定强制划分方式;S805: If the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image, at least determine the mandatory division method for the current image block according to the size information of the current image block;
这里,当当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界时,若对当前图像块进行强制划分的话,可以进一步降低视频序列编解码的计算复杂度,提升压缩性能。那么,在一些可能的实施方式下,针对未超出当前图像的边界的图块,S805可以包括:根据尺寸信息,如当前图像块的宽和高,计算当前图像块的宽与高的比值;若比值大于第四预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,第四预设阈值为正整数;若比值小于第五预设阈值,即当前图像块的高与宽的比值大于第四预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,第五预设阈值为第四预设阈值的倒数。Here, when the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image, if the current image block is forcibly divided, the computational complexity of encoding and decoding of the video sequence can be further reduced, and the compression performance can be improved. Then, in some possible implementation manners, for a tile that does not exceed the boundary of the current image, S805 may include: according to the size information, such as the width and height of the current image block, calculate the ratio of the width and height of the current image block; If the ratio is greater than the fourth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method. The fourth preset threshold is a positive integer; if the ratio is less than the fifth preset threshold, the ratio of the height and width of the current image block is greater than The fourth preset threshold determines that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, and the fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
这里,上述第四预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置,也可以从码流中高层语法元素(例如,SPS、PPS或slice header)解析得到。第四预设阈值可以取最大比值maxRatio,例如4或8。第五预设阈值可以通过第四预设阈值取倒数来计算获得,那么,第五预设阈值可以取1/maxRatio,取值范围为(0,1),例如1/4或者1/8。Here, the above fourth preset threshold can be set in the video encoder or video decoder, or can also be parsed from high-level syntax elements (for example, SPS, PPS, or slice header) in the code stream. The fourth preset threshold may take a maximum ratio maxRatio, for example, 4 or 8. The fifth preset threshold can be calculated by taking the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold, then, the fifth preset threshold can be 1/maxRatio, with a value range of (0, 1), such as 1/4 or 1/8.
在实际应用中,对于特殊类型的图像块,除了根据当前图像块的宽和高来确定强制划分方式之外,还可以可以结合其他参数,如图像块的类型,那么,上述S805还可以包括:判断当前图像块是否为I条带(slice)或者I帧(frame);判断当前图像块的宽和高是否均等于第六预设阈值,此时,第六预设阈值为正整数;若当前图像块为I条带或者I帧,且当前图像块的宽和高均等于第六预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照QT的划分方式划分。在本申请实施例中,上述第六预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置(如设置为128或者256),也可以从码流中高层语法元素(例如,SPS、PPS或slice header)解析得到。In practical applications, for a specific type of image block, in addition to determining the forced division method according to the width and height of the current image block, other parameters may also be combined, such as the type of image block, then the above S805 may also include: Determine whether the current image block is an I slice or I frame; determine whether the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset threshold. At this time, the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer; if the current If the image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method. In the embodiment of the present application, the sixth preset threshold may be set in the video encoder or video decoder (for example, set to 128 or 256), or high-level syntax elements (for example, SPS, PPS or slice header) parsed.
其中,图像块是I条带(slice)或者I帧(frame)中所有的CU只能使用帧内预测方式进行编码。Among them, the image block is an I slice (slice) or all CUs in an I frame (frame) can only be encoded using intra prediction.
S806:按照确定出的强制划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。S806: Divide the current image block according to the determined forced division method.
这里,通过S806确定当前图像块的强制划分方式后,根据确定出的强制划分方式对当前图像块进行强制划分,得到多个子块。Here, after determining the forced division mode of the current image block through S806, the current image block is forcedly divided according to the determined forced division mode to obtain multiple sub-blocks.
接下来,解码端可以针对这些子块中的每一个子块执行S801至S806,以此类推,直至所有的子块均无法继续划分,此时解码端可以得到上述当前图像块下的叶子节点,这些叶子节点对应的图像区域即为CU。然后,解码端从码流中解析获取每个CU对应的语法元素,并对该CU执行解码操作,得到当前图像块对应的重建信号,也就是重建当前图像块。Next, the decoding end can perform S801 to S806 for each of these sub-blocks, and so on, until all the sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time, the decoding end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, The image area corresponding to these leaf nodes is the CU. Then, the decoding end parses and obtains the syntax element corresponding to each CU from the code stream, and performs a decoding operation on the CU to obtain a reconstruction signal corresponding to the current image block, that is, to reconstruct the current image block.
在一些可能的实施方式下,在编码端执行完成S806后,也可以针对这些子块中的每一个子块执行S801至S806,以此类推,直至所有的子块均无法继续划分,此时解码端可以得到上述当前图像块下的叶子节点,这些叶子节点对应的图像区域即为CU。然后,编码端对每一个CU进行预测处理、变换处理、量化处理、熵编码处理,实现当前图像块的编码。In some possible implementation manners, after S806 is performed at the encoding end, S801 to S806 may also be performed for each of these sub-blocks, and so on, until all sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time decoding The end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, and the image area corresponding to these leaf nodes is the CU. Then, the coding end performs prediction processing, transformation processing, quantization processing, and entropy coding processing on each CU to realize coding of the current image block.
在本申请实施例中,通过上述方法可以确定出未超出当前图像的边界的当前图像块所对应的强制划分方式,反之,若当前图像块的不满足上述条件的话,则无法确定出当前图像块对应的强制划分方式,那么,此时,解码端还可以采用如下方式来为当前图像块确定划分方式,例如,从当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式,并按照最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分;或者,从码流中解析出当前图像块对应的语法元素,并按照语法元素所指示的划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。In the embodiment of the present application, the above method can be used to determine the forced division mode corresponding to the current image block that does not exceed the boundary of the current image. On the contrary, if the current image block does not meet the above conditions, the current image block cannot be determined Corresponding to the mandatory division method, then, at this time, the decoding end can also determine the division method for the current image block in the following manner, for example, determine the final division method from the division methods allowed for the current image block, and follow the final division method Divide the current image block; or, parse out the syntax element corresponding to the current image block from the code stream, and divide the current image block according to the division method indicated by the syntax element.
在本申请实施例中,图像块允许使用的划分方式为解码合法的划分方式。对于一个图像块来说,还可以根据其参数(例如宽、高、图像边界、编码树层级等)判断节点是否允许使用VBT划分、HBT划分、VEQT划分、HEQT划分、QT划分等划分方式。如果图像块允许使用一种划分方式,则解码端解码此图像块时使用该种划分方式便能够正常解码;否则,解码端解码此图像块时会默认不使用该种划分方式进行解码。In the embodiment of the present application, the division method allowed for the image block is a legal division method for decoding. For an image block, it is also possible to determine whether a node is allowed to use VBT division, HBT division, VEQT division, HEQT division, QT division, etc. according to its parameters (such as width, height, image boundary, coding tree level, etc.). If the image block allows one division method, the decoding side can decode the image block normally using this division method; otherwise, the decoding side will decode the image block by default without using this division method for decoding.
在一些可能的实施方式下,在从当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式之前,还可以确定当前图像块不允许使用的划分方式;其中,若当前图像块的高等于第七预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用HBT的划分方式和VEQT的划分方式;若当前图像块的宽等于第七预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用VBT的划分方式和HEQT的划分方式;若当前图像块的高小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用HEQT的划分方式;若当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用VEQT的划分方式。In some possible implementation manners, before determining the final division mode from the division modes allowed by the current image block, it is also possible to determine the division mode not allowed by the current image block; where, if the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh The preset threshold determines that the current image block is not allowed to use HBT division and VEQT division; if the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VBT division and HEQT Division method; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use HEQT division; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, the current image is determined Blocks are not allowed to use VEQT division.
这里,上述第七预设阈值和第八预设阈值可在视频编码器或者视频解码器中进行设置,也可以从码流中高层语法元素(例如,SPS、PPS或slice header)解析得到。其中,第七预设阈值可以取第七预设阈值为最小编码单元边长minCUSize,也就是最小CU边长,例如取4或8。第八预设阈值可以通过计算第七预设阈值的2倍来获得,即第八预设阈值取minCUSize×2,例如取8或16。当然,对于第七预设阈值和第八预设阈值的取值还可以为其他值,并不限于上述举例。Here, the seventh preset threshold and the eighth preset threshold may be set in a video encoder or a video decoder, or may be parsed from a high-level syntax element (for example, SPS, PPS, or slice header) in the code stream. The seventh preset threshold may be taken as the minimum preset unit side length minCUSize, that is, the minimum CU side length, for example, 4 or 8. The eighth preset threshold can be obtained by calculating twice the seventh preset threshold, that is, the eighth preset threshold is minCUSize×2, for example, 8 or 16. Of course, the values of the seventh preset threshold and the eighth preset threshold may also be other values, which are not limited to the above examples.
在本申请实施例中,根据当前图像块的块信息,判断当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界,此时,还可以为该当前图像块确定强制划分方式,并按照确定出的强制划分方式进行划分,从而进一步降低视频序列编解码的计算复杂度,从而提升了压缩性能。In the embodiment of the present application, according to the block information of the current image block, it is determined that the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image. At this time, a forced division method may also be determined for the current image block, and performed according to the determined forced division method Divide, so as to further reduce the computational complexity of video sequence encoding and decoding, thereby improving compression performance.
下面以具体实例来对上述图像块划分方法进行说明。The method for dividing the above image blocks will be described below with specific examples.
例如,解码端实施上述图像块划分方法,那么,该方法包括:For example, if the decoding side implements the above image block division method, then the method includes:
步骤1:判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界;Step 1: Determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image;
解码端在当前图像中,按照之字形(Zigzag)进行扫描的过程中,当扫描到当前图像中的一个图像块,即当前图像块时,从当前图像中或者从码流中解析得到当前图像块的块信息,然后,根据这些块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界。In the process of scanning according to the zigzag (Zigzag) in the current image, when the decoding end scans an image block in the current image, that is, the current image block, the current image block is parsed from the current image or from the code stream Block information, and then, based on these block information, determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image.
具体的,以下给出了判断当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界、下边界、右下边界的例子,如果以下条件1至条件3中,有一种条件成立,则表示当前图像块超出当前图像的边界,否则表示当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界。Specifically, the following gives an example of judging that the current image block exceeds the right border, the lower border, and the lower right border of the current image. If one of the following conditions 1 to 3 is true, it means that the current image block exceeds the current image. Boundary, otherwise it means that the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image.
条件1:如果当前图像块中存在(x,y)的值满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH≤picH,则当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界;Condition 1: If the value of (x, y) in the current image block satisfies x+cW>picW, and y+cH≤picH, the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image;
条件2:如果当前图像块中存在(x,y)的值满足x+cW≤picW,且y+cH>picH,则当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界;Condition 2: If the value of (x, y) in the current image block satisfies x+cW≤picW, and y+cH>picH, the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image;
条件3:如果当前图像块中存在(x,y)的值满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH>picH,则当前图像块超出当前图像的右下边界。Condition 3: If the value of (x, y) in the current image block satisfies x+cW>picW and y+cH>picH, the current image block exceeds the lower right boundary of the current image.
其中,当前图像的宽是picW,高是picH,当前图像块的宽是cW,高是cH,(x,y)表示当前节点中的左上顶点的像素点相对于当前图像左上顶点像素位置的坐标。Among them, the width of the current image is picW, the height is picH, the width of the current image block is cW, the height is cH, (x, y) represents the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current node relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image .
步骤2:当前图像块超出当前图像的边界时,确定当前图像块的强制划分方式。Step 2: When the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, determine the forced division method of the current image block.
如果当前图像块超出当前图像的边界,则可以根据以下方法的一种来确定当前图像块的强制划分方式。If the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, the forced division method of the current image block can be determined according to one of the following methods.
方法一:method one:
当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时:如果当前图像块的宽等于阈值K,且当前图像块的高大与阈值K,则当前图像块强制使用HBT划分;否则,当前图像块强制使用VBT划分。其中,第一预设阈值K可为任意大于等于1的整数,例如64。When the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image: If the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold K, and the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold K, the current image block is forced to use HBT division; otherwise, the current image block is forced to use VBT division . The first preset threshold K may be any integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, 64.
当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时:如果当前图像块的高等于阈值K,且当前图像块的宽大于阈值K,则当前图像块强制使用VBT划分;否则,当前图像块强制使用HBT划分。其中阈值K可为任意大于等于1的整数,例如64。When the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image: if the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold K and the width of the current image block is greater than the threshold K, the current image block is forced to use VBT division; otherwise, the current image block is forced to use HBT division . The threshold K may be any integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, 64.
当当前图像块超出当前图像的右下边界时:当前图像块强制使用QT划分。When the current image block exceeds the lower right border of the current image: the current image block is forced to use QT division.
方法二:Method Two:
当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时:如果当前图像块的宽等于阈值M,且当前图像块的高等于阈值L,则当前图像块强制使用HBT划分;否则,当前图像块强制使用VBT划分。其中阈值M、阈值L可为大于等于32的整数,例如阈值M为64,阈值L为128。When the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image: If the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold M and the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold L, the current image block is forced to use HBT division; otherwise, the current image block is forced to use VBT division . The threshold M and the threshold L may be integers greater than or equal to 32, for example, the threshold M is 64 and the threshold L is 128.
当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时:如果当前图像块的高等于阈值M,且当前图像块的宽等于阈值L,则当前图像块强制使用VBT划分;否则,当前图像块强制使用HBT划分。其中阈值M、阈值L可为大于等于32的整数,例如阈值M为64,阈值L为128。When the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image: If the height of the current image block is equal to the threshold M and the width of the current image block is equal to the threshold L, the current image block is forced to use VBT division; otherwise, the current image block is forced to use HBT division . The threshold M and the threshold L may be integers greater than or equal to 32, for example, the threshold M is 64 and the threshold L is 128.
当当前图像块超出当前图像的右下边界时:当前图像块强制使用QT划分。When the current image block exceeds the lower right border of the current image: the current image block is forced to use QT division.
在步骤1之后,还可以执行步骤3,步骤3与步骤2并无先后顺序。After step 1, step 3 can also be performed, and step 3 and step 2 are not in order.
步骤3:当前图像块未超出图像边界时,确定当前图像块的划分方式;Step 3: When the current image block does not exceed the image boundary, determine the division method of the current image block;
步骤3.1:确定当前图像块的强制划分方式;Step 3.1: Determine the forced division method of the current image block;
当前图像块的强制划分方式可以通过以下方法中的一种推导得到,举例如下:The forced division of the current image block can be derived by one of the following methods, for example:
如果当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于阈值maxRatio,则当前图像块强制使用VBT划分;If the width-to-height ratio of the current image block is greater than the threshold maxRatio, the current image block is forced to use VBT division;
如果当前图像块的高与宽的比值大于阈值maxRatio(即当前图像块的宽与高的比值小于阈值1/maxRatio),则当前图像块强制使用HBT划分;If the ratio of the height and width of the current image block is greater than the threshold maxRatio (that is, the ratio of the width and height of the current image block is less than the threshold 1/maxRatio), the current image block is forced to use HBT division;
其中,阈值maxRatio可为大于或者等于1的整数,例如4或8。The threshold maxRatio may be an integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, 4 or 8.
如果当前图像块所在的图像类型是I帧,并且当前的宽和高均为第六预设阈值S,则当前图像块强制使用QT的划分方式,其中,S为大于等于1的整数,例如128或者256。If the image type of the current image block is I frame, and the current width and height are both the sixth preset threshold S, then the current image block is forced to use QT division, where S is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 128 Or 256.
如果当前图像块的强制划分方式由上述推到方法均无法推到得到,则表明当前图像块不存在强制划分方式,此时,可以执行下述步骤3.2或步骤3.3确定当前图像块的划分方式。If the forced division method of the current image block cannot be obtained by the above-mentioned pushing method, it indicates that there is no forced division method for the current image block. At this time, the following step 3.2 or step 3.3 may be executed to determine the division method of the current image block.
步骤3.2:确定当前图像块允许使用的划分方式;Step 3.2: Determine the allowed division method of the current image block;
当前图像块允许使用的划分方式为解码合法的划分方式。对于一个图像块,还可以根据其参数(例如宽、高、图像边界、编码树层级等)判断图像块是否允许VBT划分、HBT划分、VEQT划分、HEQT划分和QT划分等。如果允许使用一种划分方式,则解码器解码此图像块时使用这种划分方式可以正常解码;否则,解码器解码此图像块时默认不会使用这种划分方式进行解码。The division method allowed for the current image block is the legal division method for decoding. For an image block, you can also determine whether the image block allows VBT division, HBT division, VEQT division, HEQT division, and QT division based on its parameters (such as width, height, image boundary, coding tree level, etc.). If a division method is allowed, the decoder can use this division method to decode normally when decoding the image block; otherwise, the decoder will not use this division method for decoding by default when decoding the image block.
更具体的,以下给出一些判断图像块不允许使用某一种或者多种划分方式的例子:如果当前图像块的高等于第七预设阈值minCUSize,则当前图像块不允许使用HBT划分。其中,minCUSize称为最小CU边长,例如等于4或8。More specifically, some examples are given below to determine whether one or more division methods are not allowed for an image block: If the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold minCUSize, the current image block is not allowed to use HBT division. Among them, minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example, equal to 4 or 8.
如果当前图像块的宽等于第七预设阈值minCUSize,则当前图像块不允许使用VBT划分。其中,minCUSize称为最小CU边长,例如等于4或8。If the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold minCUSize, the current image block is not allowed to use VBT division. Among them, minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example, equal to 4 or 8.
如果当前图像块的高小于或者等于第八预设阈值minCUSize×2,或者当前图像块的宽等于第七预设阈值minCUSize,则当前图像块不允许使用HEQT划分。其中,minCUSize称为最小CU边长,例如等于4或8。If the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold minCUSize×2, or the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold minCUSize, the current image block is not allowed to use HEQT division. Among them, minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example, equal to 4 or 8.
如果当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第八预设阈值minCUSize×2,或者当前图像块的高等于第七预设阈值minCUSize,则当前图像块不允许使用VEQT划分。其中,minCUSize称为最小CU边长,例如等于4或8。If the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold minCUSize×2, or the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold minCUSize, the current image block is not allowed to use VEQT division. Among them, minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example, equal to 4 or 8.
在本申请实施例中,还可以采用其他方法判断当前图像块允许使用的划分方法,在此不做具体限定。In the embodiment of the present application, other methods may also be used to determine the division method allowed for the current image block, which is not specifically limited herein.
步骤3.3:确定当前图像块对应的语法元素所指示的划分方式;Step 3.3: Determine the division method indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block;
当前图像块的划分方式除了根据步骤3.2所述的推到得到,还可以码流中解析该当前图像块对应的语法元素,从语法元素中获得编码时当前图像块对应的划分方式。In addition to the deduction method of the current image block according to step 3.2, the syntax element corresponding to the current image block can also be parsed in the code stream, and the division method corresponding to the current image block during encoding can be obtained from the syntax element.
步骤4:根据为当前图像块所确定的划分方式对当前图像块进行划分,得到以当前图像块为跟节点的所有叶子节点,即CU;Step 4: Divide the current image block according to the division method determined for the current image block to obtain all leaf nodes, ie CUs, with the current image block as the follow-up node;
解码端根据为当前图像块所确定的划分方式对当前图像块进行划分,获得对应的子节点,并依次对每个子节点确定的划分方式,进而确定其划分方式。如果当前图像块不再划分,则当前图像块为CU。The decoding end divides the current image block according to the division mode determined for the current image block, obtains corresponding child nodes, and determines the division mode for each child node in turn, and then determines the division mode. If the current image block is no longer divided, the current image block is CU.
步骤5:从码流中解析获取每个CU的语法元素并对该CU做解码操作,得到当前图像块对应的重建块。Step 5: Analyze and obtain the syntax elements of each CU from the code stream and perform a decoding operation on the CU to obtain the reconstruction block corresponding to the current image block.
从码流中解析每个CU的语法元素,获得每个CU和各子区域的预测信息和残差信 息,可根据各子区域相应的预测信息对各子区域执行帧间预测处理或帧内预测处理,得到各子区域的帧间预测块或帧内预测块。再根据各子区域的残差信息,将变换系数经过反量化和反变换处理得到残差块,并叠加到对应子区域的预测块上,产生重建块,也就是重建当前图像块。Parse the syntax elements of each CU from the code stream to obtain prediction information and residual information for each CU and each sub-region, and perform inter-prediction processing or intra prediction on each sub-region according to the corresponding prediction information of each sub-region After processing, an inter prediction block or an intra prediction block of each sub-region is obtained. According to the residual information of each sub-region, the transform coefficients are subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing to obtain a residual block, which is superimposed on the prediction block of the corresponding sub-region to generate a reconstructed block, that is, to reconstruct the current image block.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例还提供了一种图像块划分装置,该图像划分装置可以应用于视频编码器和视频解码器。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, an embodiment of the present application further provides an image block dividing device, which can be applied to a video encoder and a video decoder.
图10为本申请实施例中的图像块划分装置的结构示意图,如图10所示,该图像块划分装置100包括:获取单元101、判断单元102、确定单元103以及划分单元104;其中,获取单元101,用于获取当前图像中当前图像块的块信息;判断单元102,用于根据块信息,判断当前图像块是否超出当前图像的边界;确定单元103,用于若当前图像块超出当前图像的边界,则为当前图像块确定强制划分方式;划分单元104,用于按照强制划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。10 is a schematic structural diagram of an image block division device in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10, the image block division device 100 includes: an acquisition unit 101, a judgment unit 102, a determination unit 103, and a division unit 104; Unit 101, used to obtain the block information of the current image block in the current image; judgment unit 102, used to determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image based on the block information; determination unit 103, used if the current image block exceeds the current image , The boundary of the current image block is determined to be a forced division mode; the division unit 104 is used to divide the current image block according to the forced division mode.
在上述技术方案的基础上,确定单元,具体用于将当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,尺寸信息是由块信息获得的;。On the basis of the above technical solution, the determining unit is specifically used to compare the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold to determine the corresponding forced division method for the current image block, and the size information is obtained from the block information;
在上述技术方案的基础上,确定单元,包括:第一确定子单元和第二确定子单元;第一确定子单元,用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时,若比较结果表明当前图像块的宽等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高大于或者第一预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照水平二叉树HBT的划分方式划分;若比较结果表明当前图像块的宽不等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高小于或者等于或者第一预设阈值,确定当前图像块强制按照竖直二叉树VBT的划分方式划分,第一预设阈值为正整数;第二确定子单元,用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界时,若比较结果表明当前图像块的宽等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高等于第三预设阈值时,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;若比较结果表明当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;第二预设阈值小于第三预设阈值。Based on the above technical solution, the determination unit includes: a first determination subunit and a second determination subunit; the first determination subunit is used when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the comparison result indicates that the current The width of the image block is equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is greater than or the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the horizontal binary tree HBT division; if the comparison result indicates that the width of the current image block is not Is equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to or the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the vertical binary tree VBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; the second determination The subunit is used to determine the current when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the comparison result indicates that the width of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold The image blocks are forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the comparison result indicates that the width of the current image block is not equal to the second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forced to follow the VBT The division is divided; the second preset threshold is less than the third preset threshold.
在上述技术方案的基础上,确定单元,包括:第三确定子单元和第四确定子单元;第三确定子单元,用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时,若比较结果表明当前图像块的宽大于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高等于第一预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;还用于若比较结果表明当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第一预设阈值,且当前图像块的高不等于第一预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,第一预设阈值为正整数;或者,第四确定子单元,用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的下边界时,若比较结果表明当前图像块的高等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的宽等于第三预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;比较结果表明当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;第二预设阈值小于第三预设阈值。Based on the above technical solution, the determination unit includes: a third determination subunit and a fourth determination subunit; the third determination subunit is used when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the comparison result indicates that the current The width of the image block is greater than the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; also used if the comparison result indicates that the width of the current image block is less than Or equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or, the fourth determiner Unit for determining the current image block if the comparison result indicates that the height of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the width of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image It is forcibly divided according to the VBT division; the comparison result indicates that the width of the current image block is not equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is not equal to the third preset threshold, which determines that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division; The second preset threshold is less than the third preset threshold.
在上述技术方案的基础上,第二预设阈值为大于或者等于32的整数。Based on the above technical solution, the second preset threshold is an integer greater than or equal to 32.
在上述技术方案的基础上,第二预设阈值为64,第三预设阈值为128。Based on the above technical solution, the second preset threshold is 64, and the third preset threshold is 128.
在上述技术方案的基础上,确定单元,具体用于当当前图像块超出当前图像的右边界且超出当前图像的下边界时,确定当前图像块强制按照四叉树QT的划分方式划分。Based on the above technical solution, the determining unit is specifically configured to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the quadtree QT division method when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
在上述技术方案的基础上,判断单元,用于根据块信息,获得当前图像块中的一个像素点的坐标(x,y);判断像素点的坐标(x,y)是否满足预设条件,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第一预设条件,则表明像素超出当前图像的右边界,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第二预设条件,则表明像素超出当前图像的下边界,若像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第三预设条件,则表明像素点超出当前图像的右边界且超出当前图像的下边界。Based on the above technical solution, a judgment unit is used to obtain the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block according to the block information; determine whether the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy the preset condition, If the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the first preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the pixel coordinates (x, y) meet the second preset condition, it means that the pixel exceeds the current image If the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point meet the third preset condition, it means that the pixel point exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
在上述技术方案的基础上,像素点的坐标(x,y)为当前图像块中的左上顶点的像素点相对于当前图像左上顶点像素位置的坐标;相应地,第一预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH≤picH;第二预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW≤picW,且y+cH>picH;第三预设条件为:像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH>picH;其中,cW为当前图像块的宽,cH为当前图像块的高,picW为当前图像的宽,picH为当前图像的高。Based on the above technical solution, the pixel coordinates (x, y) are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image; accordingly, the first preset condition is: pixels The coordinates (x, y) of the point satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH≤picH; the second preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy x+cW≤picW, and y+cH> picH; the third preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixels satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH; where cW is the width of the current image block, and cH is the height of the current image block, picW is the width of the current image, and picH is the height of the current image.
在上述技术方案的基础上,确定单元,还用于若当前图像块未超出当前图像的边界,则至少根据当前图像块的尺寸信息为当前图像块确定强制划分方式,尺寸信息是由块信息获得的;划分单元,还用于按照确定出的强制划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。On the basis of the above technical solution, the determining unit is also used to determine a mandatory division method for the current image block based on at least the size information of the current image block if the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image. The size information is obtained from the block information ; The division unit is also used to divide the current image block according to the determined forced division method.
在上述技术方案的基础上,确定单元,还包括:计算子单元、第五确定子单元、第六确定子单元;计算子单元,用于根据尺寸信息,计算当前图像块的宽与高的比值;第五确定子单元,用于若比值大于第四预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,第四预设阈值为正整数;第六确定子单元,用于若比值小于第五预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,第五预设阈值为第四预设阈值的倒数。Based on the above technical solution, the determination unit further includes: a calculation subunit, a fifth determination subunit, and a sixth determination subunit; the calculation subunit is used for calculating the ratio of the width to the height of the current image block according to the size information The fifth determination subunit is used to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method if the ratio is greater than the fourth preset threshold, and the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer; the sixth determination subunit is used for the ratio If it is smaller than the fifth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, and the fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
在上述技术方案的基础上,确定单元,还包括:判断子单元和第七确定子单元;判断子单元,用于判断当前图像块是否为I条带或者I帧;还用于判断当前图像块的宽和高是否均等于第六预设阈值,第六预设阈值为正整数;第七确定子单元,用于若当前图像块为I条带或者I帧,且当前图像块的宽和高均等于第六预设阈值,则确定当前图像块强制按照QT的划分方式划分。Based on the above technical solution, the determination unit further includes: a determination subunit and a seventh determination subunit; a determination subunit, used to determine whether the current image block is an I-strip or an I frame; and also used to determine the current image block Whether the width and height of are equal to the sixth preset threshold, and the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer; the seventh determination subunit is used if the current image block is an I-strip or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block If they are all equal to the sixth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
在上述技术方案的基础上,划分单元,还用于当为当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,从当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式,并按照最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分;或者,当为当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,按照当前图像块对应的语法元素所指示的划分方式,对当前图像块进行划分。Based on the above technical solution, the division unit is also used to determine the final division method from the division methods allowed for the current image block when the mandatory division method is not determined for the current image block, and to determine the current division method according to the final division method. The image block is divided; or, when a mandatory division method is not determined for the current image block, the current image block is divided according to the division method indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block.
在上述技术方案的基础上,划分单元,还用于在按照当前图像块允许使用的划分方式,对当前图像块进行划分之前,根据当前图像块的尺寸信息,确定当前图像块不允许使用的划分方式;其中,若当前图像块的高等于第七预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用HBT的划分方式和VEQT的划分方式,第七预设阈值为最小编码单元CU 的边长;若当前图像块的宽等于第七预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用VBT的划分方式和HEQT的划分方式;若当前图像块的高小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用HEQT的划分方式,第八预设阈值为第七预设阈值的2倍;若当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定当前图像块不允许使用VEQT的划分方式。On the basis of the above technical solution, the dividing unit is also used to determine the divisions that are not allowed to be used by the current image block according to the size information of the current image block before dividing the current image block according to the allowed division method of the current image block Method; wherein, if the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use HBT division and VEQT division, the seventh preset threshold is the side length of the smallest coding unit CU; If the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the VBT division method and the HEQT division method; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, the current image block is determined HEQT division is not allowed. The eighth preset threshold is twice the seventh preset threshold; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use VEQT division .
需要说明的是,上述获取单元101、判断单元102、确定单元103以及划分单元104可应用于编码端或解码端的图像块划分过程。It should be noted that the above acquisition unit 101, judgment unit 102, determination unit 103, and division unit 104 can be applied to the image block division process at the encoding end or the decoding end.
还需要说明的是,获取单元101、判断单元102、确定单元103以及划分单元104的具体实现过程可参考图8对应实施例的详细描述,为了说明书的简洁,这里不再赘述。It should also be noted that, for the specific implementation process of the obtaining unit 101, the determining unit 102, the determining unit 103, and the dividing unit 104, reference may be made to the detailed description of the corresponding embodiment in FIG. 8, and for the sake of brevity of the description, no further description is provided here.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种视频编码方法,该方法可以应用于是上述任意一个技术方案中所述的编码端。该视频编码方法包括:执行如上述一个或者多个实施例中所述的图像块划分方法对当前编码块进行划分;对当前编码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;根据当前编码块和预测块,获得对应的残差块;对残差块进行熵编码,生成对应的码流。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, embodiments of the present application provide a video encoding method, which can be applied to the encoding end described in any one of the above technical solutions. The video coding method includes: performing the image block division method as described in one or more embodiments above to divide the current coding block; predicting the CU divided by the current coding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; according to the current coding Block and prediction block to obtain the corresponding residual block; entropy coding the residual block to generate the corresponding code stream.
这里,编码端针对这当前编码块及其划分出的每一个子块执行S801至S806,直至所有的子块均无法继续划分,此时编码端可以得到上述当前图像块下的叶子节点,这些叶子节点对应的图像区域即为CU。然后,编码端对每一个CU进行预测处理,获得对应的预测块,然后在根据当前图像块和预测块,获得对应的残差块,进而对残差块进行熵编码,生成对应的码流,实现对当前图像块的编码。Here, the encoding end performs S801 to S806 for this current encoding block and each sub-block divided by it, until all sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time, the encoding end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, these leaves The image area corresponding to the node is the CU. Then, the encoding end performs prediction processing on each CU to obtain the corresponding prediction block, and then obtains the corresponding residual block according to the current image block and the prediction block, and then entropy encodes the residual block to generate the corresponding code stream. To encode the current image block.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种视频解码方法,该方法可以应用于是上述任意一个技术方案中所述的解码端。该视频解码方法,包括:执行如上述一个或者多个实施例中所述的图像块划分方法对当前解码块进行划分;对当前解码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;根据从码流中解析出的残差块和预测块,重建当前解码块。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, embodiments of the present application provide a video decoding method, which can be applied to the decoding end described in any one of the above technical solutions. The video decoding method includes: performing the image block division method as described in one or more embodiments above to divide the current decoding block; predicting the CU divided by the current decoding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; according to The residual block and the prediction block parsed in the code stream are used to reconstruct the current decoding block.
这里,解码端针对这当前解码块及其划分出的每一个子块执行S801至S806,直至所有的子块均无法继续划分,此时解码端可以得到上述当前图像块下的叶子节点,这些叶子节点对应的图像区域即为CU。然后,解码端从码流中解析获取每个CU对应的语法元素,获得每个CU和各子区域的预测信息和残差信息,可根据各子区域相应的预测信息对各子区域执行帧间预测处理或帧内预测处理,得到各子区域的帧间预测块或帧内预测块。再根据各子区域的残差信息,将变换系数经过反量化和反变换处理得到残差块,并叠加到对应子区域的预测块上,产生重建块,也就是重建当前图像块。Here, the decoding end performs S801 to S806 for the current decoding block and each sub-block divided by it until all sub-blocks cannot be further divided, at this time the decoding end can obtain the leaf nodes under the current image block, these leaves The image area corresponding to the node is the CU. Then, the decoding end parses and obtains the syntax elements corresponding to each CU from the code stream, obtains the prediction information and residual information of each CU and each sub-region, and can perform inter-frame on each sub-region according to the corresponding prediction information of each sub-region The prediction process or the intra prediction process obtains the inter prediction block or the intra prediction block of each sub-region. According to the residual information of each sub-region, the transform coefficients are subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing to obtain a residual block, which is superimposed on the prediction block of the corresponding sub-region to generate a reconstructed block, that is, to reconstruct the current image block.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种视频编码器,视频编码器用于编码图像块,包括:如执行如上述一个或者多个实施例中所述的图像块划分装置,其中,图像块划分装置用于从当前图像中获取当前编码块的块信息,当前图像块 为当前图像中待编码的图像块;根据块信息,判断当前编码块是否超出当前编码图像的边界;若当前编码块超出当前编码图像的边界,则为当前编码块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前编码块进行划分;第一预测处理单元,用于对当前编码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;残差计算单元,用于根据当前编码块和预测块,获得对应的残差块;熵编码单元,用于对残差块进行熵编码,生成对应的码流。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, an embodiment of the present application provides a video encoder for encoding an image block, including: performing an image block division device as described in one or more of the above embodiments, wherein , The image block dividing device is used to obtain the block information of the current coding block from the current image. The current image block is the image block to be coded in the current image; according to the block information, it is determined whether the current coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coding image; if the current If the coding block exceeds the boundary of the current coded image, a forced division method is determined for the current coding block, and the current coding block is divided according to the forced division method; the first prediction processing unit is used to predict the CU divided by the current coding block, Obtain the corresponding prediction block; the residual calculation unit, used to obtain the corresponding residual block according to the current coding block and the prediction block; the entropy coding unit, used to entropy encode the residual block to generate the corresponding code stream.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种视频解码器,视频解码器用于从码流中解码出图像块,包括:如执行如上述一个或者多个实施例中所述的图像块划分装置,其中,图像块划分装置用于从码流中获取当前解码块的块信息,当前解码块为当前图像中待解码的图像块;根据块信息,判断当前解码块是否超出当前解码图像的边界;若当前解码块超出当前解码图像的边界,则为当前解码块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前解码块进行划分;第二预测处理单元,用于对当前解码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;重建单元,用于根据从码流中解析出的残差块和预测块,重建当前解码块。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, embodiments of the present application provide a video decoder for decoding an image block from a code stream, including: performing an image as described in one or more embodiments above Block dividing device, wherein the image block dividing device is used to obtain the block information of the current decoded block from the code stream, the current decoded block is the image block to be decoded in the current image; according to the block information, it is judged whether the current decoded block exceeds the current decoded image The boundary of the current decoding block; if the current decoding block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image, determine the mandatory division mode for the current decoding block, and divide the current decoding block according to the mandatory division mode; the second prediction processing unit is used to divide the current decoding block The CU performs prediction to obtain the corresponding prediction block; the reconstruction unit is used to reconstruct the current decoding block according to the residual block and the prediction block parsed from the code stream.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种用于编码视频数据的设备,该设备包括:存储器,用于存储视频数据,所述视频数据包括一个或多个图像块;视频编码器,用于从当前图像中获取当前编码块的块信息,当前图像块为当前图像中待编码的图像块;根据块信息,判断当前编码块是否超出当前编码图像的边界;若当前编码块超出当前编码图像的边界,则为当前编码块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前编码块进行划分;对当前编码块划分出的子块进行编码,获得当前编码块对应的码流。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, embodiments of the present application provide an apparatus for encoding video data. The apparatus includes: a memory for storing video data, and the video data includes one or more image blocks; video encoding Is used to obtain the block information of the current encoding block from the current image. The current image block is the image block to be encoded in the current image; according to the block information, it is determined whether the current encoding block exceeds the boundary of the current encoding image; if the current encoding block exceeds At the boundary of the current coded image, a mandatory division method is determined for the current coding block, and the current coding block is divided according to the mandatory division method; the sub-blocks divided by the current coding block are coded to obtain the code stream corresponding to the current coding block.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种用于解码视频数据的设备,该设备包括:存储器,用于存储码流形式的视频数据;视频解码器,用于从码流中获取当前解码块的块信息,当前解码块为当前图像中待解码的图像块;根据块信息,判断当前解码块是否超出当前解码图像的边界;若当前解码块超出当前解码图像的边界,则为当前解码块确定强制划分方式,并按照强制划分方式对当前解码块进行划分;对当前解码块划分出的CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;根据从码流中解析出的残差块和预测块,重建当前解码块。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, embodiments of the present application provide an apparatus for decoding video data. The apparatus includes: a memory for storing video data in the form of a code stream; and a video decoder for extracting data from the code stream Obtain the block information of the current decoded block. The current decoded block is the image block to be decoded in the current image; according to the block information, determine whether the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image; if the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image, it is The current decoding block determines the mandatory division method, and divides the current decoding block according to the mandatory division method; predicts the CU divided by the current decoding block to obtain the corresponding prediction block; according to the residual block and prediction parsed from the code stream Block to reconstruct the current decoded block.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种编码设备,包括:相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器,所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行如上述一个或者多个实施例中所述的图像块划分方法的部分或全部步骤。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, embodiments of the present application provide an encoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, and the processor calls program codes stored in the memory to execute, for example, Part or all of the steps of the image block division method described in the above one or more embodiments.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种解码设备,包括:相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器,所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行如上述一个或者多个实施例中所述的图像块划分方法的部分或全部步骤。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, an embodiment of the present application provides a decoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, and the processor calls program codes stored in the memory to execute Part or all of the steps of the image block division method described in the above one or more embodiments.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储了程序代码,其中,所述程序代码包括用于执行如上述一个或者多个实施例中所述的图像块划分方法的部分或全部步骤的指令。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores a program code, where the program code includes one or more Instructions for some or all steps of the image block division method described in the embodiments.
基于与上述方法相同的发明构思,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,当所 述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如上述一个或者多个实施例中所述的图像块划分方法的部分或全部步骤。Based on the same inventive concept as the above method, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute images as described in one or more of the above embodiments Part or all steps of the block division method.
本领域技术人员能够领会,结合本文公开描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块和算法步骤所描述的功能可以硬件、软件、固件或其任何组合来实施。如果以软件来实施,那么各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤描述的功能可作为一或多个指令或代码在计算机可读媒体上存储或传输,且由基于硬件的处理单元执行。计算机可读媒体可包含计算机可读存储媒体,其对应于有形媒体,例如数据存储媒体,或包括任何促进将计算机程序从一处传送到另一处的媒体(例如,根据通信协议)的通信媒体。以此方式,计算机可读媒体大体上可对应于(1)非暂时性的有形计算机可读存储媒体,或(2)通信媒体,例如信号或载波。数据存储媒体可为可由一或多个计算机或一或多个处理器存取以检索用于实施本申请中描述的技术的指令、代码和/或数据结构的任何可用媒体。计算机程序产品可包含计算机可读媒体。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functions described in conjunction with the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and algorithm steps described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions described by the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps may be stored or transmitted as one or more instructions or codes on a computer-readable medium and executed by hardware-based processing units. Computer-readable media may include computer-readable storage media, which corresponds to tangible media, such as data storage media, or communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another (eg, according to a communication protocol). . In this manner, computer-readable media may generally correspond to (1) non-transitory tangible computer-readable storage media, or (2) communication media, such as signals or carrier waves. Data storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, code and/or data structures for implementation of the techniques described in this application. The computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.
作为实例而非限制,此类计算机可读存储媒体可包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其它光盘存储装置、磁盘存储装置或其它磁性存储装置、快闪存储器或可用来存储指令或数据结构的形式的所要程序代码并且可由计算机存取的任何其它媒体。并且,任何连接被恰当地称作计算机可读媒体。举例来说,如果使用同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、数字订户线(DSL)或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术从网站、服务器或其它远程源传输指令,那么同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、DSL或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术包含在媒体的定义中。但是,应理解,所述计算机可读存储媒体和数据存储媒体并不包括连接、载波、信号或其它暂时媒体,而是实际上针对于非暂时性有形存储媒体。如本文中所使用,磁盘和光盘包含压缩光盘(CD)、激光光盘、光学光盘、数字多功能光盘(DVD)和蓝光光盘,其中磁盘通常以磁性方式再现数据,而光盘利用激光以光学方式再现数据。以上各项的组合也应包含在计算机可读媒体的范围内。By way of example, and not limitation, such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM, or other optical disk storage devices, magnetic disk storage devices, or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or may be used to store instructions or data structures The desired program code in the form of and any other medium that can be accessed by the computer. And, any connection is properly called a computer-readable medium. For example, if a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology such as infrared, radio, and microwave is used to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source, then the coaxial cable Wire, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of media. However, it should be understood that the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media. As used herein, magnetic disks and optical discs include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), and Blu-ray discs, where magnetic discs typically reproduce data magnetically, while optical discs reproduce optically using lasers data. Combinations of the above should also be included in the scope of computer-readable media.
可通过例如一或多个数字信号处理器(DSP)、通用微处理器、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程逻辑阵列(FPGA)或其它等效集成或离散逻辑电路等一或多个处理器来执行指令。因此,如本文中所使用的术语“处理器”可指前述结构或适合于实施本文中所描述的技术的任一其它结构中的任一者。另外,在一些方面中,本文中所描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤所描述的功能可以提供于经配置以用于编码和解码的专用硬件和/或软件模块内,或者并入在组合编解码器中。而且,所述技术可完全实施于一或多个电路或逻辑元件中。One or more processes such as one or more digital signal processors (DSPs), general purpose microprocessors, application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable logic arrays (FPGAs), or other equivalent integrated or discrete logic circuits To execute instructions. Accordingly, the term "processor" as used herein may refer to any of the foregoing structure or any other structure suitable for implementation of the techniques described herein. In addition, in some aspects, the functions described in the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps described herein may be provided within dedicated hardware and/or software modules configured for encoding and decoding, or in combination Into the combined codec. Moreover, the techniques can be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.
本申请的技术可在各种各样的装置或设备中实施,包含无线手持机、集成电路(IC)或一组IC(例如,芯片组)。本申请中描述各种组件、模块或单元是为了强调用于执行所揭示的技术的装置的功能方面,但未必需要由不同硬件单元实现。实际上,如上文所描述,各种单元可结合合适的软件和/或固件组合在编码解码器硬件单元中,或者通过互操作硬件单元(包含如上文所描述的一或多个处理器)来提供。The technology of the present application may be implemented in a variety of devices or equipment, including wireless handsets, integrated circuits (ICs), or a set of ICs (eg, chipsets). Various components, modules or units are described in this application to emphasize the functional aspects of the device for performing the disclosed technology, but do not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units. In fact, as described above, various units may be combined in a codec hardware unit in combination with suitable software and/or firmware, or by interoperating hardware units (including one or more processors as described above) provide.
在上述实施例中,对各个实施例的描述各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述的部分,可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。In the above embodiments, the description of each embodiment has its own emphasis. For a part that is not detailed in an embodiment, you can refer to the related descriptions of other embodiments.
以上所述,仅为本申请示例性的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于 此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应该以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only exemplary specific implementations of the present application, but the scope of protection of the present application is not limited to this, and any person skilled in the art may easily think of changes or changes within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. Replacement should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (33)

  1. 一种图像块划分方法,其特征在于,包括:An image block division method, characterized in that it includes:
    获取当前图像中当前图像块的块信息;Obtain the block information of the current image block in the current image;
    根据所述块信息,判断所述当前图像块是否超出所述当前图像的边界;According to the block information, determine whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image;
    若所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的边界,则为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式;If the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image, determine a mandatory division method for the current image block;
    按照所述强制划分方式对所述当前图像块进行划分。Divide the current image block according to the forced division manner.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining of a mandatory division method for the current image block includes:
    将所述当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为所述当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,所述尺寸信息是由所述块信息获得的。Comparing the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold to determine a corresponding forced division manner for the current image block, the size information is obtained from the block information.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的右边界时,所述将所述当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为所述当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, the comparing the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold is The current image block determines the corresponding mandatory division method, including:
    若所述当前图像块的宽等于第一预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高大于第一预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照水平二叉树HBT的划分方式划分;若所述当前图像块的宽不等于第一预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高小于或者等于第一预设阈值,确定所述当前图像块强制按照竖直二叉树VBT的划分方式划分,所述第一预设阈值为正整数;或者,If the width of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold and the height of the current image block is greater than the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the horizontal binary tree HBT division method; if the The width of the current image block is not equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the vertical binary tree VBT division method, the first A preset threshold is a positive integer; or,
    若所述当前图像块的宽等于第二预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高等于第三预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;若所述当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;所述第二预设阈值小于所述第三预设阈值。If the width of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the height of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the current image The width of the block is not equal to the second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; the second preset threshold is less than The third preset threshold.
  4. 如权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的下边界时,所述将所述当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为所述当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,包括:The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, the comparing the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold is: The current image block determining the corresponding forced division method includes:
    若所述当前图像块的宽大于第一预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高等于第一预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;若所述当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第一预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高不等于第一预设阈值,确定所述当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,所述第一预设阈值为正整数;或者,If the width of the current image block is greater than the first preset threshold and the height of the current image block is equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; if the current image The width of the block is less than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, and the first preset threshold is Positive integer; or,
    若所述当前图像块的高等于第二预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的宽等于第三预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;若所述当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,确定所述当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;所述第二预设阈值小于所述第三预设阈值。If the height of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the width of the current image block is equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; if the current image The width of the block is not equal to the second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; the second preset threshold is less than Said third preset threshold.
  5. 如权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二预设阈值为大于或者等于32的整数。The method according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the second preset threshold is an integer greater than or equal to 32.
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二预设阈值为64,所述第三预设阈值为128。The method of claim 5, wherein the second preset threshold is 64, and the third preset threshold is 128.
  7. 如权利要求1至6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述当前图像块超出 所述当前图像的右边界且超出所述当前图像的下边界时,所述为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, the current image The block determines the mandatory division method, including:
    确定所述当前图像块强制按照四叉树QT的划分方式划分。It is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to a quadtree QT division manner.
  8. 如权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述块信息,判断所述当前图像块是否超出所述当前图像的边界,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the determining whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image according to the block information includes:
    根据所述块信息,获得所述当前图像块中的一个像素点的坐标(x,y);Obtain the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block according to the block information;
    判断所述像素点的坐标(x,y)是否满足预设条件,若所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第一预设条件,则表明所述像素超出所述当前图像的右边界,若所述像素的坐标(x,y)满足第二预设条件,则表明所述像素超出所述当前图像的下边界,若所述像素的坐标(x,y)满足第三预设条件,则表明所述像素点超出所述当前图像的右边界且超出所述当前图像的下边界。Judging whether the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the preset condition, if the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the first preset condition, it indicates that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image If the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy the second preset condition, it indicates that the pixel exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel satisfy the third preset condition , Indicating that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述像素点的坐标(x,y)为所述当前图像块中的左上顶点的像素点相对于当前图像左上顶点像素位置的坐标;The method according to claim 8, wherein the coordinates (x, y) of the pixels are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image;
    相应地,所述第一预设条件为:所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH≤picH;Correspondingly, the first preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH≤picH;
    所述第二预设条件为:所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW≤picW,且y+cH>picH;The second preset condition is that the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy x+cW≤picW, and y+cH>picH;
    所述第三预设条件为:所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH>picH;The third preset condition is that the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH;
    其中,cW为所述当前图像块的宽,cH为所述当前图像块的高,picW为所述当前图像的宽,picH为所述当前图像的高。Where cW is the width of the current image block, cH is the height of the current image block, picW is the width of the current image, and picH is the height of the current image.
  10. 如权利要求1至9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述根据所述块信息,判断所述当前图像块是否超出所述当前图像的边界之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein after the judging whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image according to the block information, the method further comprises:
    若所述当前图像块未超出所述当前图像的边界,则至少根据所述当前图像块的尺寸信息为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式,所述尺寸信息是由所述块信息获得的;If the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image, at least according to the size information of the current image block to determine a mandatory division method for the current image block, the size information is obtained from the block information;
    按照确定出的强制划分方式对所述当前图像块进行划分。Divide the current image block according to the determined forced division mode.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少根据所述当前图像块的尺寸信息,为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the determining of a mandatory division method for the current image block based on at least the size information of the current image block includes:
    根据所述尺寸信息,计算所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值;Calculating the ratio of the width and height of the current image block according to the size information;
    若所述比值大于第四预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,所述第四预设阈值为正整数;If the ratio is greater than a fourth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method, and the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer;
    若所述比值小于第五预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,所述第五预设阈值为所述第四预设阈值的倒数。If the ratio is less than a fifth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, and the fifth preset threshold is the reciprocal of the fourth preset threshold.
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少根据所述当前图像块的尺寸信息,为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式,包括:The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the determining the mandatory division method for the current image block at least according to the size information of the current image block includes:
    判断所述当前图像块是否为I条带或者I帧;Determine whether the current image block is an I-band or an I-frame;
    判断所述当前图像块的宽和高是否均等于第六预设阈值,所述第六预设阈值为正整数;Determine whether the width and height of the current image block are equal to a sixth preset threshold, and the sixth preset threshold is a positive integer;
    若所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧,且所述当前图像块的宽和高均等于所述第 六预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照QT的划分方式划分。If the current image block is an I-slice or an I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
  13. 如权利要求10至12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述至少根据所述当前图像块的尺寸信息,为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10 to 12, wherein after the determining of a mandatory division method for the current image block at least according to the size information of the current image block, the method further comprises:
    当为所述当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,从所述当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式,并按照所述最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分;或者,When no mandatory division method is determined for the current image block, a final division method is determined from the division methods allowed for the current image block, and the current image block is divided according to the final division method; or,
    当为所述当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,按照所述当前图像块对应的语法元素所指示的划分方式,对所述当前图像块进行划分。When no forced division mode is determined for the current image block, the current image block is divided according to the division mode indicated by the syntax element corresponding to the current image block.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述按照所述当前图像块允许使用的划分方式,对所述当前图像块进行划分之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein before dividing the current image block according to the division method allowed for the current image block, the method further comprises:
    根据所述当前图像块的尺寸信息,确定所述当前图像块不允许使用的划分方式;其中,According to the size information of the current image block, determine a division mode that the current image block is not allowed to use; wherein,
    若所述当前图像块的高等于第七预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块不允许使用HBT的划分方式和竖直扩展四叉树VEQT的划分方式,所述第七预设阈值为最小编码单元CU的边长;If the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the HBT division method and the vertical expansion quadtree VEQT division method, and the seventh preset threshold value is the minimum The side length of the coding unit CU;
    若所述当前图像块的宽等于所述第七预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块不允许使用VBT的划分方式和水平扩展四叉树HEQT的划分方式;If the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the VBT division method and the horizontally expanded quadtree HEQT division method;
    若所述当前图像块的高小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块不允许使用HEQT的划分方式,所述第八预设阈值为所述第七预设阈值的2倍;If the height of the current image block is less than or equal to an eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block does not allow the HEQT division method, and the eighth preset threshold is twice the seventh preset threshold ;
    若所述当前图像块的宽小于或者等于所述第八预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块不允许使用VEQT的划分方式。If the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the VEQT division method.
  15. 一种图像块划分装置,其特征在于,包括:An image block dividing device is characterized by comprising:
    获取单元,用于获取当前图像中当前图像块的块信息;The obtaining unit is used to obtain the block information of the current image block in the current image;
    判断单元,用于根据所述块信息,判断所述当前图像块是否超出所述当前图像的边界;The judging unit is used to judge whether the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image according to the block information;
    确定单元,用于若所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的边界,则为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式;A determining unit, configured to determine a mandatory division method for the current image block if the current image block exceeds the boundary of the current image;
    划分单元,用于按照所述强制划分方式对所述当前图像块进行划分。The dividing unit is configured to divide the current image block according to the forced division method.
  16. 如权利要求15所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元,具体用于将所述当前图像块的尺寸信息与预设阈值进行比较,为所述当前图像块确定对应的强制划分方式,所述尺寸信息是由所述块信息获得的。The apparatus according to claim 15, wherein the determining unit is specifically configured to compare the size information of the current image block with a preset threshold to determine a corresponding forced division method for the current image block, The size information is obtained from the block information.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元,包括:第一确定子单元和第二确定子单元;The apparatus according to claim 16, wherein the determining unit comprises: a first determining subunit and a second determining subunit;
    所述第一确定子单元,用于当所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的右边界时,若所述当前图像块的宽等于第一预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高大于或者第一预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照水平二叉树HBT的划分方式划分;若所述当前图像块的宽不等于第一预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高小于或者等于或者第一预设阈值,确定所述当前图像块强制按照竖直二叉树VBT的划分方式划分,所述第一预设阈 值为正整数;The first determining subunit is configured to: when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is equal to a first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is greater than Or a first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the horizontal binary tree HBT division method; if the width of the current image block is not equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is less than or Equal to or a first preset threshold, determining that the current image block is forcibly divided according to a vertical binary tree VBT division manner, and the first preset threshold is a positive integer;
    所述第二确定子单元,用于当所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的右边界时,若所述当前图像块的宽等于第二预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高等于第三预设阈值时,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;若所述当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;所述第二预设阈值小于所述第三预设阈值。The second determining subunit is configured to: when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is equal to a second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to When the third preset threshold is determined, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; if the width of the current image block is not equal to the second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the third A preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; the second preset threshold is smaller than the third preset threshold.
  18. 如权利要求16或17所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元,包括:第三确定子单元和第四确定子单元;The apparatus according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the determination unit comprises: a third determination subunit and a fourth determination subunit;
    所述第三确定子单元,用于当所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的下边界时,若所述当前图像块的宽大于第一预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高等于第一预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;还用于若所述当前图像块的宽小于或者等于第一预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高不等于第一预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,所述第一预设阈值为正整数;或者,The third determining subunit is configured to: when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the width of the current image block is greater than a first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is equal to A first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; it is also used if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not Equal to the first preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method, and the first preset threshold is a positive integer; or,
    所述第四确定子单元,用于当所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的下边界时,若所述当前图像块的高等于第二预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的宽等于第三预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分;所述当前图像块的宽不等于第二预设阈值,且所述当前图像块的高不等于第三预设阈值,确定所述当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分;所述第二预设阈值小于所述第三预设阈值。The fourth determining subunit is configured to, when the current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the height of the current image block is equal to the second preset threshold and the width of the current image block is equal to A third preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method; the width of the current image block is not equal to the second preset threshold, and the height of the current image block is not equal to the third preset The threshold value determines that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method; the second preset threshold value is smaller than the third preset threshold value.
  19. 如权利要求17或18所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二预设阈值为大于或者等于32的整数。The apparatus according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the second preset threshold is an integer greater than or equal to 32.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二预设阈值为64,所述第三预设阈值为128。The apparatus of claim 19, wherein the second preset threshold is 64, and the third preset threshold is 128.
  21. 如权利要求15至20任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元,具体用于当所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像的右边界且超出所述当前图像的下边界时,确定所述当前图像块强制按照四叉树QT的划分方式划分。The device according to any one of claims 15 to 20, wherein the determining unit is specifically configured to when the current image block exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image To determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the quadtree QT division method.
  22. 如权利要求15至21任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述判断单元,用于根据所述块信息,获得所述当前图像块中的一个像素点的坐标(x,y);判断所述像素点的坐标(x,y)是否满足预设条件,若所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第一预设条件,则表明所述像素超出所述当前图像的右边界,若所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第二预设条件,则表明所述像素超出所述当前图像的下边界,若所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足第三预设条件,则表明所述像素点超出所述当前图像的右边界且超出所述当前图像的下边界。The device according to any one of claims 15 to 21, wherein the judgment unit is configured to obtain the coordinates (x, y) of a pixel in the current image block according to the block information; Judging whether the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the preset condition, if the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy the first preset condition, it indicates that the pixel exceeds the right boundary of the current image , If the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point meet the second preset condition, it indicates that the pixel exceeds the lower boundary of the current image, if the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point meet the third pre If the condition is set, it means that the pixel point exceeds the right boundary of the current image and exceeds the lower boundary of the current image.
  23. 如权利要求22所述的装置,其特征在于,所述像素点的坐标(x,y)为所述当前图像块中的左上顶点的像素点相对于当前图像左上顶点像素位置的坐标;The device of claim 22, wherein the coordinates (x, y) of the pixels are the coordinates of the pixel position of the upper left vertex in the current image block relative to the pixel position of the upper left vertex of the current image;
    相应地,所述第一预设条件为:所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且y+cH≤picH;Correspondingly, the first preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH≤picH;
    所述第二预设条件为:所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW≤picW,且y+cH>picH;The second preset condition is that the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy x+cW≤picW, and y+cH>picH;
    所述第三预设条件为:所述像素点的坐标(x,y)满足x+cW>picW,且 y+cH>picH;The third preset condition is: the coordinates (x, y) of the pixel point satisfy x+cW>picW, and y+cH>picH;
    其中,cW为所述当前图像块的宽,cH为所述当前图像块的高,picW为所述当前图像的宽,picH为所述当前图像的高。Where cW is the width of the current image block, cH is the height of the current image block, picW is the width of the current image, and picH is the height of the current image.
  24. 如权利要求15至23任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元,还用于若所述当前图像块未超出所述当前图像的边界,则至少根据所述当前图像块的尺寸信息为所述当前图像块确定强制划分方式,所述尺寸信息是由所述块信息获得的;The apparatus according to any one of claims 15 to 23, wherein the determining unit is further configured to, if the current image block does not exceed the boundary of the current image, at least according to the current image block's The size information determines a mandatory division method for the current image block, and the size information is obtained from the block information;
    所述划分单元,还用于按照确定出的强制划分方式对所述当前图像块进行划分。The dividing unit is also used to divide the current image block according to the determined forced division mode.
  25. 如权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元,还包括:计算子单元、第五确定子单元、第六确定子单元;The apparatus of claim 24, wherein the determination unit further comprises: a calculation subunit, a fifth determination subunit, and a sixth determination subunit;
    所述计算子单元,用于根据所述尺寸信息,计算所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值;The calculation subunit is configured to calculate the ratio of the width and height of the current image block according to the size information;
    所述第五确定子单元,用于若所述比值大于第四预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照VBT的划分方式划分,所述第四预设阈值为正整数;The fifth determining subunit is configured to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the VBT division method if the ratio is greater than a fourth preset threshold, and the fourth preset threshold is a positive integer;
    所述第六确定子单元,用于若所述比值小于第五预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照HBT的划分方式划分,所述第五预设阈值为所述第四预设阈值的倒数。The sixth determining subunit is configured to determine that the current image block is forcibly divided according to the HBT division method if the ratio is less than a fifth preset threshold, and the fifth preset threshold is the fourth preset Reciprocal of the threshold.
  26. 如权利要求24或25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元,还包括:判断子单元和第七确定子单元;The apparatus according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the determination unit further comprises: a determination subunit and a seventh determination subunit;
    所述判断子单元,用于判断所述当前图像块是否为I条带或者I帧;还用于判断所述当前图像块的宽和高是否均等于第六预设阈值,所述第六预设阈值为正整数;The judging subunit is used to judge whether the current image block is an I band or an I frame; and also used to judge whether the width and height of the current image block are equal to a sixth preset threshold, and the sixth pre Set the threshold to a positive integer;
    所述第七确定子单元,用于若所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧,且所述当前图像块的宽和高均等于所述第六预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块强制按照QT的划分方式划分。The seventh determining subunit is used to determine the current image if the current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to the sixth preset threshold Blocks are forcibly divided according to the QT division method.
  27. 如权利要求24至26任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述划分单元,还用于当为所述当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,从所述当前图像块允许使用的划分方式中确定出最终划分方式,并按照所述最终划分方式对当前图像块进行划分;或者,当为所述当前图像块未确定出强制划分方式时,按照所述当前图像块对应的语法元素所指示的划分方式,对所述当前图像块进行划分。The device according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the dividing unit is further configured to allow the current image block to be used when a forced division method is not determined for the current image block Determine the final division mode in the division mode, and divide the current image block according to the final division mode; or, when no mandatory division mode is determined for the current image block, according to the syntax elements corresponding to the current image block The indicated division manner divides the current image block.
  28. 如权利要求27所述的装置,其特征在于,所述划分单元,还用于在所述按照所述当前图像块允许使用的划分方式,对所述当前图像块进行划分之前,根据所述当前图像块的尺寸信息,确定所述当前图像块不允许使用的划分方式;其中,若所述当前图像块的高等于第七预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块不允许使用HBT的划分方式和竖直扩展四叉树VEQT的划分方式,所述第七预设阈值为最小编码单元CU的边长;若所述当前图像块的宽等于所述第七预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块不允许使用VBT的划分方式和水平扩展四叉树HEQT的划分方式;若所述当前图像块的高小于或者等于第八预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块不允许使用HEQT的划分方式,所述第八预设阈值为所述第七预设阈值的2倍;若所述当前图像块的宽小于或者等于所述第八预设阈值,则确定所述当前图像块不允许使用VEQT的划分方式。The apparatus according to claim 27, wherein the dividing unit is further configured to divide the current image block according to the current before dividing the current image block according to the allowed division method of the current image block The size information of the image block determines the division method that the current image block is not allowed to use; wherein, if the height of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use the HBT division method And the vertical expansion quadtree VEQT division method, the seventh preset threshold is the side length of the smallest coding unit CU; if the width of the current image block is equal to the seventh preset threshold, it is determined that the current The image block is not allowed to use the VBT division method and the horizontally expanded quadtree HEQT division method; if the height of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to use HEQT division Way, the eighth preset threshold is twice the seventh preset threshold; if the width of the current image block is less than or equal to the eighth preset threshold, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be used The division of VEQT.
  29. 一种视频编码方法,其特征在于,包括:A video encoding method, characterized in that it includes:
    执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的图像块划分方法对当前编码块进行划分;Performing the image block division method according to any one of claims 1 to 14 to divide the current coding block;
    对所述当前编码块划分出的编码单元CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;Predict the coding unit CU divided by the current coding block to obtain a corresponding prediction block;
    根据所述当前编码块和所述预测块,获得对应的残差块;Obtain a corresponding residual block according to the current coding block and the prediction block;
    对所述残差块进行熵编码,生成对应的码流。Entropy coding the residual block to generate a corresponding code stream.
  30. 一种视频解码方法,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:
    执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的图像块划分方法对当前解码块进行划分;Performing the image block division method according to any one of claims 1 to 14 to divide the current decoded block;
    对所述当前解码块划分出的编码单元CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;Predict the coding unit CU divided by the current decoding block to obtain a corresponding prediction block;
    根据从码流中解析出的残差块和所述预测块,重建所述当前解码块。According to the residual block parsed from the code stream and the prediction block, the current decoding block is reconstructed.
  31. 一种视频编码器,其特征在于,所述视频编码器用于编码图像块,包括:A video encoder, characterized in that the video encoder is used to encode image blocks, including:
    如权利要求15至28任一项所述的图像块划分装置,其中,所述图像块划分装置用于从当前图像中获取当前编码块的块信息,所述当前图像块为当前图像中待编码的图像块;根据所述块信息,判断所述当前编码块是否超出所述当前编码图像的边界;若所述当前编码块超出所述当前编码图像的边界,则为所述当前编码块确定强制划分方式,并按照所述强制划分方式对所述当前编码块进行划分;The image block dividing device according to any one of claims 15 to 28, wherein the image block dividing device is used to obtain block information of a current coding block from a current image, where the current image block is to be coded in the current image Image block; based on the block information, determine whether the current encoding block exceeds the boundary of the current encoding image; if the current encoding block exceeds the boundary of the current encoding image, determine the mandatory for the current encoding block Dividing mode, and dividing the current coding block according to the mandatory dividing mode;
    第一预测处理单元,用于对所述当前编码块划分出的编码单元CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;A first prediction processing unit, configured to predict the coding unit CU divided by the current coding block to obtain a corresponding prediction block;
    残差计算单元,用于根据所述当前编码块和所述预测块,获得对应的残差块;A residual calculation unit, configured to obtain a corresponding residual block according to the current coding block and the prediction block;
    熵编码单元,用于对所述残差块进行熵编码,生成对应的码流。An entropy encoding unit is used to entropy encode the residual block to generate a corresponding code stream.
  32. 一种视频解码器,其特征在于,所述视频解码器用于从码流中解码出图像块,包括:A video decoder, characterized in that the video decoder is used to decode image blocks from a code stream, including:
    如权利要求15至28任一项所述的图像块划分装置,其中,所述图像块划分装置用于从码流中获取当前解码块的块信息,所述当前解码块为当前图像中待解码的图像块;根据所述块信息,判断所述当前解码块是否超出所述当前解码图像的边界;若所述当前解码块超出所述当前解码图像的边界,则为所述当前解码块确定强制划分方式,并按照所述强制划分方式对所述当前解码块进行划分;The image block dividing device according to any one of claims 15 to 28, wherein the image block dividing device is used to obtain block information of a current decoded block from a code stream, and the current decoded block is to be decoded in the current image An image block; according to the block information, determine whether the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image; if the current decoded block exceeds the boundary of the current decoded image, determine the mandatory for the current decoded block Dividing mode, and dividing the current decoding block according to the mandatory dividing mode;
    第二预测处理单元,用于对所述当前解码块划分出的编码单元CU进行预测,获得对应的预测块;A second prediction processing unit, configured to predict the coding unit CU divided by the current decoding block to obtain a corresponding prediction block;
    重建单元,用于根据从码流中解析出的残差块和所述预测块,重建所述当前解码块。The reconstruction unit is configured to reconstruct the current decoding block according to the residual block parsed from the code stream and the prediction block.
  33. 一种视频编解码设备,包括:相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器,所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。A video encoding and decoding device, comprising: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, the processor calling program code stored in the memory to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14. .
PCT/CN2019/127075 2018-12-22 2019-12-20 Image block division method and device WO2020125761A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201811575681.9 2018-12-22
CN201811575681 2018-12-22
CN201910017097.XA CN111355959B (en) 2018-12-22 2019-01-08 Image block dividing method and device
CN201910017097.X 2019-01-08

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020125761A1 true WO2020125761A1 (en) 2020-06-25

Family

ID=71101022

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/127075 WO2020125761A1 (en) 2018-12-22 2019-12-20 Image block division method and device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2020125761A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101605206A (en) * 2008-06-11 2009-12-16 联发科技股份有限公司 Video process apparatus and method thereof
KR20110077825A (en) * 2009-12-30 2011-07-07 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for detecting block boundary and apparatus thereof
CN102970526A (en) * 2011-08-31 2013-03-13 华为技术有限公司 Method and module for acquiring transformation block size
CN106664421A (en) * 2014-05-28 2017-05-10 联发科技股份有限公司 Video processing apparatus with at least one of transform unit size selection, mode information unit size selection, picture width decision and picture height decision, and related video processing method thereof

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101605206A (en) * 2008-06-11 2009-12-16 联发科技股份有限公司 Video process apparatus and method thereof
KR20110077825A (en) * 2009-12-30 2011-07-07 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for detecting block boundary and apparatus thereof
CN102970526A (en) * 2011-08-31 2013-03-13 华为技术有限公司 Method and module for acquiring transformation block size
CN106664421A (en) * 2014-05-28 2017-05-10 联发科技股份有限公司 Video processing apparatus with at least one of transform unit size selection, mode information unit size selection, picture width decision and picture height decision, and related video processing method thereof

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN111355951B (en) Video decoding method, device and decoding equipment
WO2020125595A1 (en) Video coder-decoder and corresponding method
CN111327904B (en) Image reconstruction method and device
CN111385572B (en) Prediction mode determining method and device, encoding device and decoding device
WO2020114394A1 (en) Video encoding/decoding method, video encoder, and video decoder
CN112055200A (en) MPM list construction method, and chroma block intra-frame prediction mode acquisition method and device
WO2020143585A1 (en) Video encoder, video decoder, and corresponding method
CN111355959B (en) Image block dividing method and device
WO2020135467A1 (en) Inter frame prediction method, device and corresponding encoder and decoder
US11516470B2 (en) Video coder and corresponding method
WO2020253681A1 (en) Method and device for constructing merge candidate motion information list, and codec
CN111263166B (en) Video image prediction method and device
WO2020224476A1 (en) Image division method, apparatus and device
WO2020259353A1 (en) Entropy coding/decoding method for syntactic element, device, and codec
CN113366850B (en) Video encoder, video decoder and corresponding methods
CN111726617B (en) Optimization method, device and coder-decoder for fusing motion vector difference technology
WO2020134817A1 (en) Method and device for determining prediction mode, coding device, and decoding device
WO2020114393A1 (en) Transform method, inverse transform method, video encoder, and video decoder
WO2020114509A1 (en) Video image encoding and decoding method and apparatus
CN113316939A (en) Context modeling method and device for zone bit
CN111327894A (en) Block division method, video encoding and decoding method and video encoder and decoder
WO2020125761A1 (en) Image block division method and device
CN111294603B (en) Video encoding and decoding method and device
WO2020187062A1 (en) Method and apparatus for optimization for use in merge with motion vector difference technology, and encoder-decoder
WO2020259330A1 (en) Non-separable transformation method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19899792

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19899792

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1